Home

Nortel Networks NN47200-503 User's Manual

1. 1 Select IP Routing gt RIP from the Device Manager menu The RIP dialog is opened Select the Interface Advance tab This tab is illustrated below RIP dialog Interface Advance tab x Globals Interfac VLAN 1 disable false 1 row s 2 Using the fields provided configure the advanced RIP features These fields are described in the following table Interface Advance tab fields Field Description Address The IP address of the RIP interface This field is for organizational purposes only and cannot be edited Interface The switch interface that corresponds to the listed IP address Enable Enables or disables RIP on this interface Supply Determines whether this interface supplies RIP advertisements Listen Determines whether this interface listens for RIP advertisements Poison Enables or disables poison reverse on this interface DefaultSupply Determines whether this interface advertises default routes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 226 IP Routing Configuration and Management DefaultListen Determines whether this interface listens for default route advertisements TriggeredUpdate Enables or disables triggered updates on this interface AutoAggregate Enables or disables auto aggregation on this interface InPolicy Associates a previou
2. Virtual If Message Digest deletion To delete a Virtual Message Digest entry use the following procedure Deleting a Virtual If Message Digest entry Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears Select OSPF The OSPF dialog opens Select the Virtual If Message Digest tab The Virtual If Message Digest window opens Select an Areald to delete Click Delete End OSPF statistics The Stats tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view OSPF statistics To view OSPF statistics use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 261 Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Stats tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog Stats tab x Virtual if Virtual Neighbors Hosts Link State Database Ext Link State Database General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces If Metrics Neighbors Area Aggregate Redistribute Message Digest Virtual If Message Digest Stats Absolutevalue Cumulative Average sec Minimumjsec Maximum sec Last al sec 0 0 oO oo co colo ol oloo o 9 9 9 9 090 9 9 090 9 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o
3. secondary Use this option to set up a secondary IP interface on a VLAN You can have a maximum of eight secondary IP interfaces for every primary and the primary must be set up before any secondary interfaces are configured no ip address command The no ip address command disables routing on a VLAN The syntax for the no ip address command is no ip address lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt The following table describes the parameters for this command no ip address parameters lt A B C D gt The IP address to disable routing on lt W X Y Z gt The subnet mask to disable routing on The no ip address command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode Multinetting To add a secondary IP interface to a VLAN known as Multinetting use the following procedure Adding secondary IP interfaces Step Action 1 Put the switch into interface mode for the specific VLAN interface vlan lt vlan gt 2 Create a primary interface before adding secondary interfaces if a primary interface has not yet been created ip address lt ip address gt lt mask gt lt mac offset gt 3 Define a secondary IP interface on the VLAN LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 58 IP Routing Configuration and Management L _ lt SLL ee ip address lt ip address gt lt m
4. End ARP tab The ARP tab is used to configure Address Resolution Protocol ARP entries for the switch To configure the ARP tab follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the ARP tab This tab is illustrated below ARP tab xj AAN F192 167 120 3 Ff FR iE Fff WAN 1 292 167 120 3 09 11 49 92 0 40 1 MLAN 71 92 L67 120 9 FF FR TEE F 192 16 M T Lin AAR 1292 LG 120 9 09 Ce 0 42 70 70 192 10 MZ 11 Wan FLLI 167 120 3 09 L155 Sf c 10_192 1 ree wo tl Be Semis Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 216 IP Routing Configuration and Management Click Insert The Insert ARP Entry screen opens This screen is illustrated below Insert ARP Entry screen x Interface i Port in VLAN fin z IpAddress if ol MacAddress Close Help To determine the interface and VLAN to use for the ARP entry do the following a Select a VLAN from the Port in VLAN drop down list b Using the provided dialog select the ports that will be used in this entry c The Interface field will be populated with the appropriate VLAN interface information In the fields provided enter the remainder of the required information for the new ARP entry These fields are outlin
5. 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Forwarding Lists dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert Forwarding Lists dialog 192 168 249 46 UDP_Forward Insert Forwarding Et x Idif 1 1000 Name eee Faddist S Close Help 4 Using the provided fields configure the new forwarding list These fields are outlined in the following table Insert Forwarding Lists dialog fields Field Description Id The unique identifier assigned to the forwarding list Name The name assigned to the forwarding list FwdldList The identifiers of the port server IP pairs created on the Forwardings tab and associated with the forwarding list 5 Click Insert End UDP forwarding list deletion To delete a UDP forwarding list use the following procedure Deleting a UDP forwarding list Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears 2 Select UDP Forwarding The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab selected 3 Select the Forwarding Lists tab Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 293 4 Select an Id to delete 5 Click Delete End Configuring UDP broadcast interfaces The Broadcast Interfaces tab is used to assign a forwarding list to an interfac
6. 3 Set the DHCP forwarding paths using the VLAN IP as the starting point or agent IP 4 Set the mode for each DHCP forwarding path 5 Enable DHCP for the specific VLAN 6 Enable the DHCP broadcast message for the specific VLAN End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 42 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Any of the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch management systems can be used to set DHCP DHCP relay DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a mechanism to assign network IP addresses to clients who request an address It is built on top of the existing BOOTP protocol and can be specified for DHCP BOOTP or both The DHCP relay feature relays client requests to DHCP servers on different L3 VLANs It also relays server replies back to the clients DHCP relay can be configured through Command Line Interface or Java Device Manager DHCP can only be configured on the base unit from CLI like all L3 commands There are three parts in the DHCP relay configurations They are e global DHCP enable disable e interface configurations e forward path configurations To relay DHCP messages two VLANs must be created and IP addresses assigned to them The client and server must reside on different L8 VLANS to use DHCP relay IP routing and global DHCP relay must be enable
7. TYPE Legend I Indirect Route D Direct Route A Alternative Route B Best Route E Ecmp Route U Unresolved Route N Not in HW Paths shown with the letter E in the TYPE column are designated equal cost paths In this example two routes to IP address 10 1 40 0 and two routes to IP address 10 1 30 0 are displayed Displaying global ECMP configuration To confirm global ECMP configuration use the show ecmp command A sample output from this command is displayed below 5530 24TFD show ecmp Protocol MAX PATH static 1 rip 2 ospf 4 IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager This section describes the procedures for IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager JDM Layer 3 routable VLANs The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series are Layer 3 L3 switches This means that a regular L2 VLAN becomes a routable L3 VLAN if an IP address and MAC address are attached to the VLAN When routing is enabled in L3 mode every L3 VLAN is capable of routing as well as carrying the management traffic The user can use any L3 VLAN instead of the Management VLAN to manage the switch This section covers the functionality in the Java Device Manager used to make Layer 3 Routable VLANs possible Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 2
8. 2row s 2 Click Refresh to immediately refresh the information this tab displays The following table describes the fields on this tab TCP Connections tab fields Field Description LocalAddress The local IP address for this TCP connection In the case of a connection in the listen state which is willing to accept connections for any IP interface associated with the node the value 0 0 0 0 is used LocalPort The local port number for this TCP connection RemAddress The remote IP address for this TCP connection RemPort The remote port number for this TCP connection State The state of this TCP connection End UDP Listeners tab This tab displays information on the UDP listeners currently maintained by the switch This tab is read only To view the information on this tab follow this procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 221 Step Action 1 Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the UDP Listeners tab This tab is illustrated below UDP Listeners tab a Fa f 2 Click Refresh to immediately refresh the information displayed The following table outlines the fields on this tab UDP Listeners tab fields Field Description LocalAddress The local IP address
9. ARP Interfaces tab fields Field Description lflndex The index of the configured switch interface DoProxy Enable or disable proxy ARP on the interface DoResp Enable or disable the sending of ARP responses on the specified interface Click Apply End ARP Inspection VLAN tab To view and change ARP inspection status for VLANs use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager select IP Routing gt IP The IP window appears Select the ARP Inspection VLAN tab The ARP Inspection VLAN window appears ARP Inspection VLAN tab i zl Globes Adcresves Rules Sleli Rules A33 ARF Die azea AR Irazoction VLAN APP 21 sueulio aunt TOP TEF Cu idiss J3 Litai ECVP Ma Jd Arle pestion Erebied ital affads Iltze fen 3 a Bef roms To change the ARP Inspection status for a VLAN select the VLAN Double click the Arplnspection Enabled field for the VLAN Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 218 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5 Select true to enable ARP Inspection VLAN or falseto disable ARP Inspection VLAN 6 Click Apply End ARP Inspection port tab To view and change ARP inspection status for ports use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager select IP
10. Id ifIndex Address Mask MacAddress Offset Routing 1 10001 203 203 100 53 255 255 255 0 00 15 9B F3 70 40 1 Enabled 100 10100 10 1 1 17 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F3 70 41 2 Enabled 101 10101 10 1 1 9 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F3 70 42 3 Enabled 102 10102 10 1 1 22 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F3 70 43 4 Enabled show ip ospf Router ID 1 1 1 2 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status True AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 2 External Link State Checksum 49786 0xc27a Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 99 New Link State Advertisements Received 66 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled show ip ospf area Area ID 0 0 0 0 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 8 Reachable Area Border Routers 2 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 15 Link State Advertisements Checksum 551120 0x868d0 Area ID 0 0 0 2 Import Summaries Yes Import Type No External Intra Area SPF Runs 10 Reachable Area Border Routers 1 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 9 Link State Advertisements Checksum 274851 0x431a3 Stub Metric 1 Stub Metric Type OSPF Metric Area ID 0 0 0 3 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 13
11. 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config ip address 10 1 21 2 255 255 255 0 Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 3 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 21 2 Configure VRRP on VLAN 3 The VRRP VIP address of 10 1 21 1 is added to VLAN 2 using a VRID of 2 Note Fast advertisement is disabled by default Fast advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds ms with a default of 200 If fast VRRP advertisement is desired enable fast advertisement 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router vrrp ena 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp address 2 10 1 21 1 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 2 priority 200 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 2 enable 3 Configure VLAN 2 on router R2 a Create VLAN 2 on router R2 5530 24TFD config terminal Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 194 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 type port Configure the ports for VLAN 2 on R2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 2 1 15 Configure an IP address for VLAN 2 Add IP address 10 1 20 3 255 255 255
12. 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 1 20 2 255 255 255 0 c Enable RIP for VLAN 2 and disable RIP supply and listen RIP supply and listen are not required because no router is attached to VLAN 2 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip supply disable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip listen disable 3 Configure ERS2 for VLAN 3 access a Create a port based VLAN VLAN 3 using spanning tree group 1 and include ports 1 47 and 1 48 in VLANS 5530 24TFD config vlan create 3 name VLAN 3 type port 5530 24TFD config vlan member add 3 port 1 47 48 b Assign the IP address 10 1 30 2 24 to VLAN 3 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 1 30 2 255 255 255 0 c Enable RIP for VLAN 3 and disable RIP supply and listen RIP supply and listen are not required because no router is attached to VLAN 3 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip supply disable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 127 LL amp L ee 5530 24TFD config if ip rip listen disable 4 Configure brouter port 2 7 on ERS2 a Assign the IP address 10 1 1 1 30 to port 2 7 using brouter VLAN 2090 5530 2
13. Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 217465 C Document status Standard Document version 03 01 Document date 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document a re believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that license The software license agreement is included in this document Restricted rights legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of conditions In the intere
14. Poll Interval ios bd O day 00h 00m 10s 5 The following table describes the fields on this tab OSPF Stats tab fields Fed oeo S HelloIntervalMismatches The number of hello interval mismatches received by this interface DeadIntervalMismatches The number of dead interval mismatches received by this interface OptionMismatches The number of option mismatches received by this interface RxHellos The number of hello packets received by this interface RxDBDescrs The number of database descriptor packets received by this interface RxLSUpdates The number of link state update packets received by this interface RxLSReqs The number of link state request packets received by this interface RxLSAcks The number of link state acknowledge packets received by this interface Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 264 IP Routing Configuration and Management TxHellos The number hello packets transmitted by this interface TxDBDescrs The number of database descriptor packets transmitted by this interface TxLSUpdates The number of link state update packets transmitted by this interface TxLSReqs The number of link state request packets transmitted by this interface TxLSAcks The number of link state acknowledge packets transmitted by this interface End To graph
15. Reachable Area Border Routers 2 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 177 Link State Advertisements 13 Link State Advertisements Checksum 454461 0x6ef3d show ip ospf interface Interface 10 1 1 9 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 50 Designated Router 10 1 1 9 Backup Designated Router 10 1 1 10 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 10 1 1 17 Area ID 0 0 0 2 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 50 Designated Router 10 1 1 17 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 10 1 1 22 Area ID 0 0 0 0 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 50 Designated Router 10 1 1 21 Backup Designated Router 10 1 1 22 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 203 203 100 53 Area ID 0 0 0 0 Admin State Disabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 show ip ospf neighbor Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configu
16. alte inesrfrens At rapeetes WEAN BEE Inspecticn par 11 rer Canacerans Lia lterres m fectrest riter al 5 cose tdp Park ype werat detarces Amalna tenet keken te reserved 2 owl 2 Using the fields provided view the information provided on switch routes The fields on this tab are described in the following table Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 212 IP Routing Configuration and Management Routes tab fields Field Description The destination address of the route Mask The subnet mask used by the route destination NextHop The next hop in the listed route HopOrMetric The OSPF hop count or metric associated with the route The interface associated with the route Proto The protocol associated with the route PathType The route path type Pref The preference value associated with the route End Note Routes will not be displayed until at least one port in the VLAN has link The route list can be updated by clicking the Refresh button The route list can also be filtered This is described below Filtering route information The Routes tab can be filtered to display only the desired switch routes Use the following procedure to filter the Routes tab Step Action 1 With the Routes tab open click the Filter bu
17. 255 255 255 0 b Configure IST MLT on R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config mlt 1 member 2 1 2 2 5530 24TFD config vlan port 2 1 2 2 tagging enable 5530 24TFD config mlt 1 enable c Configure the IST and add the IST to VLAN 3999 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface mlt 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 198 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5530 24TFD config if ist enable peer ip 2 1 1 2 vlan 3999 2 Configure VRRP and SMLT for access VLAN to E1 a Configure VLAN 2 on R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 type port Create IP address for VLAN 2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 1 20 2 255 255 255 0 Configure the access port for VLAN 2 on R1 and add VLAN 2 to the IST and SMLT groups 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 2 1 48 1 47 2 1 2 2 Note 2 1 and 2 2 are IST ports 1 48 1 47 are SMLT ports Create SMLT on R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config mlt 2 member 1 47 1 48 5530 24TFD config mlt 2 enable 5530 24TFD config interface mlt 2 5530 24TFD config if smlt 1 Enable OSPF interface on VLAN 2 of R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5530 24TFD con
18. 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router rip enable 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip send version rip2 Configure receive mode parameters 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router rip enable 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip receive version rip2 Enable poison reverse Note RIP Split Horizon is enabled by default By setting the Poison parameter to true Poison Reverse is enabled If Poison Reverse is enabled the RIP updates sent to a neighbor from which a route is learned are poisoned with a metric of 16 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 125 Therefore the receiver neighbor ignores this route because the metric 16 indicates infinite hops in the network These mechanisms prevent routing loops 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip 5530 24TFD config if ip rip poison enable End Configuring RIP This section describes the set up of a basic RIP configuration between two Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series routers As illustrated in the following diagram router ERS2 is configured between router ERS1 and the edge of the network core Two VLANs VLAN
19. DHCP relay uses a hardware resource that is shared by switch Quality of Service applications When DHCP relay is enabled globally the Quality of Service filter manager will not be able to use precedence 11 for configurations For the filter manager to be able to use this resource DHCP relay must be disabled for the entire unit or stack Avoiding duplicate IP addresses The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series has built in safeguards to avoid issuing duplicate IP addresses because the switch functions as a stack as well as a stand alone system These safeguards apply to stack configuration changes for example when a stack is forming or after a unit is removed from a stack The system allows the use of an existing IP address under the following conditions e When a unit leaves a stack Ifthe unit was the acting Base Unit BU of the stack and the stack consisted of only two units lf the IP blocking mode in the stack was set to none e When a unit boots up If the unit was never in a stack lf IP blocking was manually turned off prior to the current boot If the unit was the designated Base Unit BU that is selected by hardware switch on the unit either on the back or on the UI button on the front and the stack consisted of only two units lf the IP blocking mode was set to none If the desired switch IP address is blocked by the system then the address must be configured manually in the comman
20. Nortel Networks 278 IP Routing Configuration and Management NotificationCntl Indicates whether the VRRP enabled router generates Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps based on VRRP events e Enabled SNMP traps are sent e Disabled SNMP traps are not sent PingVirtualAddrEnabled Indicates whether this device should respond to pings directed to a virtual router s IP address 3 Click Apply End VRRP interface creation The Interface Address tab of the VRRP dialog is used to create new VRRP interfaces Configuration and management of these interfaces is performed on the Interfaces tab To create new VRRP interfaces use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt VRRP from the Device Manager menu The VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected Select the Interface Address tab This tab is illustrated below VRRP sas Interface Address tab Interfaces Stats wid Ipaddr VLAN 1 1 192 168 249 46 active 1 row s 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Interface Address dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 279 5 Insert Interface Address dialog P s2 190 24940 VRRP Insert Interface Aa IfIndex Yrid 1
21. OSPF dialog will open Select the Areas tab This tab is illustrated above 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Areas dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert Areas dialog xi Areatd ImportAsExtern importExternal importNoExternal C importNssa_ Close Help 4 Using the fields provided create the new area These fields are described in the following table Insert Areas dialog fields Field Description Areald The area s unique identifier Area ID 0 0 0 0 is used for the OSPF backbone ImportAsExtern The area s support for importing Autonomous System external link state advertisements The options available in this drop down list are importExternal importNoExternal and importNssa 5 Click Insert End OSPF area deletion To delete an OSPF area use the following procedure Deleting an OSPF area Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 234 IP Routing Configuration and Management Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog opens 2 Select the Areas tab 3 Select an ArealD to delete 4 Click Delete End Stub Area Metrics configuration The Stub Area Metrics tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure stub area metrics associated with different types of service To configu
22. RIP metrics RIP is known as a distance vector protocol The vector is the network number and next hop and the distance is the cost associated with the network number RIP identifies network reachability based on cost and cost is defined as hop count The distance from one router to the next is considered to be one hop This cost or hop count is known as the metric The illustration below depicts the hop counts between various units in a network RIP hop counts Ve e I in a Legend 0 hop 1 hop 2 hop Vez Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 1101 4fa A directly connected network has a metric of zero An unreachable network has a metric of 16 Therefore 15 hops or 15 routers is the highest possible metric between any two networks Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 26 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols RIP Send and Receive Modes RIP can be configured to use a number of different send and receive modes depending on the specifics of the network configuration The following table lists the send and receive modes supported RIP send and receive modes Send Mode Description Result rip1comp This mode is used to e Destination MAC is a broadcast broadcast RIP version ff ff ff ff ff ff 2 Updates using REG e Destination IP is a broadcast 1058 route consumpt
23. Reachable Area Border Routers 1 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 9 Link State Advertisements Checksum 274851 0x431a3 Stub Metric 1 Stub Metric Type OSPF Metric show ip ospf interface Interface 10 1 1 18 Area ID 0 0 0 2 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 0 Designated Router 10 1 1 17 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 172 3 3 1 Area ID 0 0 0 2 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 172 3 3 1 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 203 203 100 51 Area ID 0 0 0 0 Admin State Disabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 show ip ospf Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 188 IP Routing Configuration and Management Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm 10 1 1 18 1 1 1 2 10 1 1 17 50 Full 0 Dyn Total OSPF Neighbors 1 show ip route Ip Route DST MASK NEXT COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF 172 3 3 0 255 255 255 252 172 3 3 1 1 1000 C DB 0
24. These fields are described in the table below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 238 IP Routing Configuration and Management lf Metrics tab fields Field Description IpAddress The IP address of the interface The Type of Service associated with the metric The value advertized to other areas indicating the distance from the OSPF router to any network in the range This is an integer value between 0 and 65535 Status Displays the status of the entry Active or Not Active This field is read only 3 Click Apply End Neighbor information The Neighbors tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view OSPF neighbor information To view OSPF neighbors use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Neighbors tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog Neighbors tab 192 168 249 46 OSPF xj Ext Link State Database Area Aggregate Redistril sage Digest Stats General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces If Metrics ink State Database IpAddr AddressLessIndex Router Options Priority State Events RetransmissionQueueLength qj a Orow s 2 Using the fields provided view the OSPF neighbor information These fields a
25. points For example the 32 bit IP address 10000000 00100000 00001010 10100111 is expressed in dotted decimal notation as 128 32 10 167 Each IP address class when expressed in binary notation has a different boundary point between the network and host portions of the address as illustrated in Network and host boundaries in IP address classes page 14 The network portion is a network number field from 8 through 24 bits The remaining 8 through 24 bits identify a specific host on the network Network and host boundaries in IP address classes Class A bit 0 78 31 et ae Network Host portion portion Class B bit 01 15 16 31 Network Host portion portion Class C bit 012 23 24 31 C lt Network J Host portion portion 9750EA Subnet addressing Subnetworks or subnets are an extension of the IP addressing scheme Subnets allow an organization to use one IP address range for multiple networks Subnets are two or more physical networks that share a common network identification field the network portion of the 32 bit IP address Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 15 A subnet address is created by increasing the network portion to include a subnet address thus decreasing the host portion of the IP address For example in the address 128 32 10 0 the net
26. sent AutoVirtLinkEnable Indicates status of OSPF automatic Virtual Link The default setting is disabled SpfHoldDownTime OspfAction The SPF Hold Down Timer value is an integer between 3 and 60 The SPF will run at most once per hold down timer value An immediate OSPF action to take Select runSpf and click Apply to do an immediate SPF run Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 231 Field Description Rfc1583Compatibility Controls the preference rules used when choosing among multiple Autonomous System external link state advertisements advertising the same destination When this is enabled the preference rule will be the same as specified by RFC 1583 When disabled the new preference rule as described in RFC 2328 will be applicable This potentially prevents the routing loops when Autonomous System external link state advertisements for the same destination have been originated from different areas LastSpfRun Used to indicate the time the last SPF calculation was done 3 Click Apply End OSPF area configuration The Areas tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF area parameters To configure these parameters use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Devi
27. the forwarded UDP packets coming out of the selected VLAN interface The ip forward protocol udp command interface mode command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 115 DHCP relay commands This section covers the commands that are used to configure and manage DHCP on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series both globally on the switch and on each VLAN Setting DHCP To set DHCP perform the following procedure Step Action 1 Enable DHCP globally 2 Set a VLAN IP as the DHCP agent and a Server IP as the DHCP server to configure an ip dhcp relay forwarding path 3 Set the mode for each DHCP forwarding path 4 Enable DHCP for the specific VLAN 5 Enable the DHCP broadcast message for the specific VLAN End ip dhcp relay command The ip dhcp relay command is used to enable DHCP relay DHCP relay is enabled by default The syntax for this command is ip dhcp relay This command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode This command has no parameters no ip dhcp relay command The no ip dhcp relay command is used to disable DHCP relay The syntax for this command is no ip dhcp relay This command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode This com
28. 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 160 IP Routing Configuration and Management default cost 1 area 0 0 0 2 import summaries enable area 0 0 0 3 import external area 0 0 0 3 import summaries enable exit enable configure terminal interface vlan 101 ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 50 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf transmit delay 1 ip ospf retransmit interval 5 ip ospf hello interval 10 ip ospf dead interval 40 ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 100 ip ospf area 0 0 0 2 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 50 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 102 ip ospf area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 50 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 1 ip ospf area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable no ip ospf enable exit 3 R3 configuration commands STP Phase 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP
29. 172 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 17 40 100 T 5 O IB 25 10 1 1 16 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 18 1 100 C DB 0 10 1 1 24 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 17 30 100 T 5 O IB 25 10 1 1 20 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 17 20 100 T 5 O IB 25 10 1 1 8 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 17 20 100 T 5 O IB 25 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 17 40 100 T 5 O IB 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 1 1 17 11 100 T 5 O IB 25 Total Routes 8 TYPE Legend I Indirect Route D Direct Route A Alternative Route B Best Route E Ecmp Route U Unresolved Route N Not in HW Diagnosing neighbor state problems At initial startup routers transmit hello packets in an attempt to find other OSPF routers with which form adjacencies After the hello packets are received the routers perform an initialization process which causes the routers to transition through various states before the adjacency is established The following table lists the states a router can go through during the process of forming an adjacency OSPF neighbor states Step State Description 1 Down Indicates that a neighbor was configured manually but the router did not received any information from the other router This state can occur only on NBMA interfaces 2 Attempt On an NBMA interface this state occurs when the router attempts to send unicast hellos to any configured interfaces The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series does not support NBMA type Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Rout
30. 255 255 0 20 1 1 1 1 105 C DB 0 10 1 1 16 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 1 30 103 T 1 O IB 25 10 1 1 20 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 1 20 103 T 1 O IB 25 10 1 1 24 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 25 1 104 C DB 0 10 1 1 8 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 26 20 104 T 2 O IB 20 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 2 1 103 DB 0 TYPE Legend I Indirect Route D Direct Route A Alternative Route B Best Route E Ecmp Route U Unresolved Route N Not in HW Router R4 Status show vlan Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active IVL SVL Mgmt 1 VLAN 1 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL Yes Port Members 3 6 9 26 101 VLAN 101 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 7 8 104 VLAN 104 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 1 2 show vlan ip Id ifIndex Address Mask MacAddress Offset Routing 1 10001 203 203 100 54 255 255 255 0 00 15 9B F2 2C 40 1 Enabled 101 10101 10 1 1 10 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F2 2C 41 2 Enabled 104 10104 10 1 1 26 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F2 2C 42 3 Enabled show ip ospf Router ID 1 1 1 4 Admin Status Enabled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 184 IP Routing Configuration and Management Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status False AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 2 External Link State Checksum 45698 0xb282 Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False O
31. 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 36 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Route policies supports the following types of policies Accept In Policies Accept polices are applied to incoming routing updates before they are applied to the routing table In the case of RIP accept policies can be applied to all incoming packets and only one policy can be created for each RIP interface In the case of OSPF accept policies are only applied to Type 5 External routes based on the advertising router ID There can only be one OSPF accept policy per switch and the policy is applied before updates are added to the routing table from the link state database Announce Out Policies Announce policies are applied to outgoing routing updates before the routing update packets are actually transmitted from the switch In the case of RIP announce policies can be applied to all outgoing packets and only one policy can be created for each RIP interface Announce policies are not supported for OSPF as OSPF requires routing information to be consistent throughout the OSPF domain Redistribution Policies Redistribution policies are used to provide notification of addition or deletion of a route in the routing table by one protocol to another protocol OSPF redistribution policies send redistributed routes as Type 5 External routes There can be only one OSPF redistribution route per switch and it must b
32. Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the definition and configuration of up to eight secondary interfaces on each VLAN multinetting With IP multinetting you can associate multiple IP subnets with one VLAN That is connected hosts can belong to different IP subnets on the same VLAN Multinetting can be configured using the CLI or the Device Manager The following diagram illustrates a network with configured IP multinetting Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 18 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Network with Multinetting IP Layer IP Layer Subnet A Subnet B Host 1 Host 4 Host 3 Host 2 SubnetA Subnet B SubnetB Subnet A You can configure a static route with the next hop on the secondary interface You can also add static ARP for a given IP address in the same subnet of a secondary interface Here are some limitations when you are working with secondary interfaces e you can have a maximum of eight secondary interfaces on each VLAN you can have a total maximum of 256 IP interfaces including primary and secondary e all of the secondary interfaces on a VLAN are enabled or disabled together There is no provision for configuring the administrative state of the secondary IP interfaces individually e dynamic routing is not available for secondary IP interfaces secondary
33. Global Configuration command mode traceroute command The traceroute command displays the route taken by IP packets to a specified host Note The traceroute command when applied to a stack can be executed only on the base unit TIP Type CTRL C to interrupt the command The syntax for the traceroute command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 5 1 27 August 2007 IP routing configuration using the CLI 63 traceroute lt Hostname A B C D ip gt lt m gt lt p gt lt q gt lt v gt lt w gt lt 1 1464 gt The following table describes the parameters for this command traceroute parameters Parameter Description Hostname Enter the name of the remote host A B C D Enter the A B C D name of the remote host ip Enter the IP address of the remote host m Specifies the maximum time to live ttl The value for this parameter is in the rage from 1 255 The default value is 10 Example traceroute 10 3 2 134 m 10 p Specifies the base UDP port number The value for this parameter is in the range from 0 65535 Example traceroute 1 2 3 4 p 87 q Specifies the number of probes per time to live The value for this parameter is in the range from 1 255 The default value is 3 Example traceroute 10 3 2 134 q 3 V Specifies verbose mode Example traceroute 10 3 2 134 v W Spe
34. IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 229 This section describes the configuration of OSPF on the switch using the Java Device Manager Global OSPF configuration The General tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure global OSPF parameters To configure these parameters use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open with the General tab selected This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog General tab SS xj Hosts LinkState Database Ext Unk State Database wees Aggregte Redatrbte Messagetiget Virtual F Message Digest Stats Greed vers Stub Aves Matrics Inter soes ya Metis Neighbors wwr Vetual Neighbors Adata C embed C drbd Vermontaaniber Ares htr2 stus faise P ASS Ptr Status ExterniseCount 0 Erten ssOsumSum 0 jejeje Using the fields provided configure the global OSPF parameters These fields are described in the following table General tab fields Field Description Routerld The unique ID of the router in the Autonomous System AdminStat The administrative status of OSPF on the router VersionNumber The current OSPF version number AreaBrdRirStatus Denotes whether this router is an Area Border Router ASBrdRtrStatus Denotes whether this router is an Autonomous System Border Router Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Pro
35. Information Protocol RIP configuration 122 Open Shortest Path First OSPF configuration 134 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP configuration 190 Equal Cost Multipath ECMP 204 IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 206 Layer 3 routable VLANs 206 IP routing 209 Routing Information Protocol RIP configuration 222 Open Shortest Path First OSPF configuration 228 Route policies 264 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 277 Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP 284 Brouter port 285 UDP broadcast forwarding 288 UDP broadcast interface deletion 295 DHCP configuration 295 Configuring IGMP snooping using the Java Device Manager 305 Configuring IGMP using Web based management 309 Configuring IGMP using the Web based Management Interface 309 Displaying multicast membership using the Web based Management Interface 312 Index 314 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Preface This document provides information and instructions on the configuration of IP Routing on the 5500 Series Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch Consult any documentation included with the switch and the product release notes see Related publications page 10 for any errata before beginning the configuration process Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series 5500 Series Switch Platforms page 9 outlines the
36. Interface Configuration mode default ip rip poison command The default ip rip poison command is used to disable RIP poison reverse on the interface The syntax of the default ip rip poison command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 81 I LLL ee default ip rip poison enable The default ip rip poison command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip proxy announce command The default ip rip proxy announce command is used to disable proxy announcement on the interface The syntax of the default ip rip proxy announce command is default ip rip proxy announce enable The default ip rip proxy announce command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip receive command The default ip rip receive command is used to set the default RIP version to listen to on this interface The syntax of the default ip rip receive command is default ip rip receive lt rip version gt The default ip rip receive command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip send command The default ip rip send command is used to set the default RIP version to send on this interface The syntax of the default ip rip send command is default ip rip send lt rip version gt The default ip rip send command is executed i
37. L3 mode every L3 VLAN is capable of doing routing as well as carrying the management traffic Any L3 VLAN can be used instead of the Management VLAN to manage the switch Layer 2 versus Layer 3 mode When the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series is configured to route IP traffic between different VLANs the switch is considered to be running in L3 mode otherwise the switch runs in L2 mode The L3 manager determines in which mode a switch or a stack should be run The mode is determined based on the user settings and events But the general rule is to select e L838 mode if routing is turned on globally for the switch or stack e L2 mode if routing is turned off globally for the switch or stack Routing and management In L3 mode the Management VLAN as well as all other L3 VLANs has the capability to route and carry the management traffic In this release of the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series the settings apply to all L3 VLANs or only to the Management VLAN VLAN settings page 20 shows all possible settings and default settings for each type of VLAN VLAN settings Routing Management VLAN Feature default Routing Default Route Management VLAN On Yes Management L2 mode VLAN only Management VLAN On off on On No L3 mode L3 VLAN On off on On off on Yes global Setting IP routing To set IP routing or L3 VLANs take the following steps Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Serie
38. Layer 3 core As demonstrated below both R1 and R2 switches are configured with a port based VLAN VLAN 2 with SMLT and VRRP set to enabled This topology provides failover protection and load balancing Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 197 The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series E1 running in Layer 2 mode is configured with one port based VLAN and one MultiLink Trunking MLT group for the aggregate uplink ports The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switches R1 and R2 are configured with backup master enabled so that both switches can reply to ARP VRRP with SMLT configuration R1 VLAN 2 IP 10 1 20 2 24 VRRP VIP 10 1 20 1 vrp backup master enabled virp priority 100 VLAN 3999 IST VLAN MLTID 1 IP 10 1 20 3 24 VRRP VIP 10 1 20 1 vrrp backup master enabled vrrp prionty 100 Legend as Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 Vez Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 Layer 2 Mode VLAN2 IST VLAN The following procedure would be used to recreate the illustrated topology Step Action 1 Configure the IST VLAN on R1 a Configure IST VLAN 3999 on R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan create 3999 type port 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3999 5530 24TFD config if ip address 2 1 1 1
39. Manager For more information refer to IGMP snooping page 46 To enable IGMP Snooping for a VLAN use the following procedure Enabling IGMP Snooping for a VLAN Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select gt VLAN The VLAN dialog opens 2 Select the Snoop tab The Snoop dialog opens VLAN Snoop tab bese mna rena satong vetet IO BS ta A a se 3 Select a VLAN 4 To enable snooping double click the Enable field for the VLAN and select true 5 To enable proxy reporting double click the field and select true 6 To change other field values click the field and enter the value 7 Click Apply to commit the configuration changes End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 306 Configuring IGMP snooping using the Java Device Manager TIP You can change the presentation order of the VLANs in the Snoop table Click the column name of any column An up or down arrow indicating ascending or descending order appears next to the column name VLAN Snoop tab fields QueryInterval ActiveQuerier Field Description i Name The VLAN name Enable Specifies snooping status e if false snooping is disabled e if true snooping is enabled ReportProxyEnable Specifies the IGMP report proxy status e if false no proxy report generates e if true
40. NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 102 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip prefix list parameters Parameter Description lt prefix_name gt The name assigned to the prefix list lt ip_address mask gt The IP address and subnet mask of the prefix list The subnet mask is expressed as a value between 0 and 32 lt mask_from gt The subnet range covered by the prefix list from the stated IP address lt mask_to gt The subnet range covered by the prefix list to the stated IP address lt new_prefix_name gt Used to assign a new name to previously configured prefix list The ip prefix list command is executed in the Global Configuration mode route map command The route map command is used to define route maps used in the configuration of route policies The syntax of the route map command is route map lt map name gt permit deny lt sequence number gt enable match interface lt prefix list gt next hop lt prefix list gt protocol lt protocol name gt route source lt prefix list gt route type lt route type gt name lt new map name gt set injectlist lt prefix list gt mask lt ip_ address gt metric lt metric_value gt metric type lt metric type gt nssa pbit enable The following table outlines the parameters for this command route map parameters Field Description lt map_name gt The name ass
41. Routing gt DHCP from the Device Manager menu The following figure illustrates the DHCP Relay tab DHCP Relay tab El DHCP Relay DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping VLAN DHCP Snooping port DHCP Bindings IP Source Guard port IP Source Guard addresses AgentAddr ServerAddr Enable Mode ft a To configure a DHCP entry use the following procedure Creating a DHCP entry Step Action 1 From the Device Manager select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP Relay tab appears 2 Click the Insert button The DHCP Insert DHCP Relay dialog as illustrated in the following figure appears IV Enable Mode E boop r ho a both Close Help 3 Make the new DHCP progressRelay entry in the fields provided The following table describes the fields in the Insert DHCP Relay dialog Insert DHCP Relay fields Field Description AgentAddr The IP address configured on an interface ServerAddr The IP address of the DHCP server This IP address should be a remote address so the DHCP packet is sent through unicast to the remote device Enable Enables the DHCP mode Indicate whether this entry pertains to BOOTP packets DHCP packets or both Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 297 4 Click Insert The new DHCP
42. Routing gt IP The IP window appears 2 Select the ARP Inspection port tab The ARP Inspection port window appears ARP Inspection port tab 192 167 120 9 P xj Cehak Ardames scutes Grane crates ale an cteefares gir mpaten Wate ARP bepeciuerperl ier i Canreetines 1941 aare rer Si TEES Zorondz 3 To change the ARP Inspection status for a port select the port 4 Double click the ArpInspectionlfTrusted field for the port 5 Select true enable ARP Inspection or falseto disable ARP Inspection 6 Click Apply End Note ArplnspectionlfTrusted controls whether or not the interface is trusted for ARP inspection Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 219 TCP tab The TCP tab displays Transmission Control Protocol TCP information for the switch This is a read only tab To view information on the TCP tab follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the TCP tab This tab is illustrated below TCP tab 2 1921671290 eee zj Chhas Aderans Ra tea rahe Routes ati akt nadana ane ngeran nan ant raceetinn nort ier TEF Cu iredias orientan eme see taf mo 2row s 2 Click Refresh to immedi
43. SLL ee no ip arp proxy enable The no ip arp proxy command is executed in the Layer 3 IP VLAN Interface Configuration mode default ip arp proxy command The default ip arp proxy command is used to return the switch to the default proxy ARP settings The syntax of the default ip arp proxy command is default ip arp proxy enable The default ip arp proxy command is executed in the Layer 3 IP VLAN Interface Configuration mode show ip arp proxy interface command The show ip arp proxy interface command is used to display the status of proxy ARP on an interface The syntax of the show ip arp proxy interface command is show ip arp proxy interface vlan lt vlan_id gt The show ip arp proxy interface command is executed in the User EXEC mode Routing Information Protocol RIP commands This section describes the CLI commands used to configure and manage the Routing Information Protocol RIP on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series RIP is a distance vector protocol used to dynamically discover network routes based on information passed between routers in the network RIP is useful in network environments where using static route administration would be difficult router rip enable command The router rip enable command is used to globally enable RIP on the switch RIP must be globally enabled on the switch before it becomes operational The syntax of the router rip enable command is router rip enable The rout
44. The VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected Select the Interfaces tab This tab is illustrated below VRRP dialog Interfaces tab xi Globals Interface Addre Stats PrimaryIpAddr VirtualMacAddr AdminState VLAN 1 1 192 168 249 46 00 00 5e 00 01 01 initialize down a tes SY oan 1 row s 2 Manage VRRP interfaces using the provided fields These fields are outlined in the following table Interfaces tab fields Field Description Iflndex The interface index of the VRRP interface Vrid A number that uniquely identifies a virtual router on a given VRRP router PrimarylpAddr An IP address selected from the set of real interface addresses VRRP advertisements are always sent using the primary IP address as the source of the IP packet VirtualMacAddr The virtual MAC address of the virtual router State The current state of the virtual router A virtual router can be in one of the following states initalize indicates the virtual router is waiting for a startup event backup indicates the virtual router is monitoring the availability of the master router or master indicates the virtual router is forwarding packets for IP addresses associated with the router Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java
45. basic holddown lt timer value gt The lt timer_value gt parameter represents a value between 0 and 360 seconds Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 69 The timers basic holddown command is executed in the Router Configuration mode timers basic timeout command The timers basic timeout command is used to set the RIP timeout timer The syntax of the timers basic timeout command is timers basic timeout lt timer value gt The lt timer value gt parameter represents a value between 15 and 259200 seconds The timers basic timeout command is executed in the Router Configuration mode timers basic update command The timers basic update command is used to set the RIP update timer The syntax of the timers basic update command is timers basic update lt timer value gt The lt timer_value gt parameter represents a value between 0 and 360 seconds The default timers basic update command is executed in the Router Configuration mode ip rip advertise when down command The ip rip advertise when down command is used to enable RIP advertisements on the interface being configured even when that interface is not operational The subnet on which the switch has a RIP enabled interface is advertised even if that particular network is no longer connected no link
46. below the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series R1 is automatically configured as an OSPF ABR after it is configured with an OSPF interface for area 0 0 0 0 and 0 0 0 2 ABR configuration example 10 1 1 20 30 Router ID 1 1 1 5 172 3 3 0 24 10 1 1 16 30 ABR Router ID 1 1 1 2 172 3 4 0 24 Area 2 Area 0 Legend ee Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Note R1 and A2 are stacks To recreate the illustrated ABR configuration use the following procedure Step Action 1 Configure an OSPF interface on port 2 6 Configure port 2 6 as a brouter port in VLAN 100 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 6 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 6 vlan 100 subnet 10 1 1 17 30 2 Configure an OSPF interface on port 2 1 Configure port 2 1 as a brouter port in VLAN 200 and enable OSPF on this interface 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 1 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 1 vlan 200 subnet 10 1 1 22 30 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf enable LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 146 IP Routing Configuration and Management 3 Enable OSPF Configure R1 as an ABR Note that by default OSPF interface 10 1 1 22 is placed into OSPF area 0 0 0 0 Because one additional area of 0 0 0 2 is created and OSPF interface 10 1 1 17 is added to area 0 0 0 2 R1 automatically becomes a
47. brouter ports To configure and manage brouter ports use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select a port on the Device Manager Front Panel view LLL LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 286 IP Routing Configuration and Management 2 Select Edit gt Port from the Device Manager menu The Port dialog opens with the Interface tab selected Select the IP Address tab This tab is illustrated below Port dialog IP Address tab x Interface VLAN EAPOL EAPOL Advance LacP VLACP NSNA Rate Limit ADAC STPBPDU Filtering SMLT TOR i IpAddress NetMask BcastAddrFormat Vlanid Refresh Insert Delete D E E s Her 0 row s 3 Use the provided fields to view the brouter port settings These fields are outlined in the following table IP Address tab fields Field Description IpAddress The IP address assigned to this brouter NetMask The subnet mask associated with the brouter IP address BcastAddrFormat The IP broadcast address format used on this interface ReasmMaxSize The size of the largest IP datagram which this entity can reassemble from incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on this interface Vlanld The VLAN ID associated with this brouter port MacOffset The MAC address offset associated with this brouter port End C
48. clear ip forward protocol udp counters command is executed only on the base unit in a stack The syntax for the clear ip forward protocol udp counters command is clear ip forward protocol udp counters lt 1 4094 gt where the parameter lt 1 4094 gt specifies the VLAN ID The clear ip forward protocol udp counters command is executed in the Configuration mode ip forward iprotocol udp command interface mode The ip forward protocol udp command command in interface mode is used to attach and configure UDP broadcast forwarding lists on VLAN interfaces only one list can be attached to a VLAN interface at a time The syntax of the ip forward protocol udp command interface mode command is ip forward protocol udp vlan lt vlan_id gt portfwdlist lt forward list gt broadcastmask lt bcast mask gt maxttl lt max_ttl gt The following table outlines the parameters of this command ip forward protocol udp interface mode parameters Parameter Description lt vian_id gt The VLAN ID of the interface on which the UDP forwarding list will be attached lt forward_list gt The ID of the UDP forwarding list which will be attached to the selected VLAN interface lt bcast_mask gt The 32 bit mask which will be used by the selected VLAN interface to take forwarding decisions based on the destination IP address of the incoming UDP broadcast traffic lt max_ttl gt The TTL value which will be inserted in the IP headers of
49. command is show ecmp The show ecmp command is executed in the User EXEC Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 112 IP Routing Configuration and Management Brouter port commands A brouter port is a single port VLAN that can route IP packets as well as bridge all non routable traffic The following section describes the CLI commands used to configure and manage brouter ports on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series brouter command The brouter command is used to create and manage a brouter port on the switch The syntax of the brouter command is brouter port lt brouter port gt vlan lt vid gt subnet lt ip_address mask gt routing enable The following table describes the parameters of this command brouter parameters Parameter Description lt brouter_port gt The brouter port When creating a brouter this is the port to be used for the new brouter When modifying a brouter this is the port of the existing brouter to modify lt vid gt The VLAN ID of the brouter When creating a new brouter port this is the VLAN ID assigned to the brouter port lt ip_address mask gt The IP address and subnet mask of the brouter When creating a new brouter this is the IP address and subnet mask assigned When modifying a brouter port this is the new IP address and
50. comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import laws and regulations d Neither party may bring an action regardless of form more than two years after the cause of the action arose e The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between Customer and Nortel Networks f This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software If the Software is acquired in the United States then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state of New York Revision History Date Revised Version Reason for revision July 2005 1 00 New document for Software Release 4 2 July 2006 2 00 Document updated for Software Release 5 0 August 2007 3 01 updated for Software Release 5 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 6 Revision History Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Contents Preface 9 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series 9 Related publications 10 Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site 11 How to gethelp 12 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols 13 IP routing 13 IP addressing 13 IP routing using VLANs 16 Brouter port 19
51. digest entry The value is an integer between 1 and 255 Type Specifies the type of virtual interface digest entry Key Specifies the key associated with the virtual interface message digest entry 4 Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to refresh the information in the view insert or delete information copy settings export information to an external file or print End Virtual If Message Digest creation To create a Virtual Message Digest entry use the following procedure Creating a Virtual If Message Digest entry Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears 2 Select OSPF The OSPF window opens 3 Select the Virtual If Message Digest tab The Virtual If Message Digest screen opens 4 Click Insert The OSPF Insert Virtual If Message Digest window opens Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 260 IP Routing Configuration and Management OSPF Insert Virtual If Message Digest window 192 167 120 9 OSPF TransitDelay fi 0 3600 sec RetransInterval 5 0 3600 sec HelloInterval fio 1 65535 sec RtrDeadInterval 60 0 2147483647 sec AuthType ie none simplePassword mds AuthKey Close Hep Enter the information in the fields provided Click Insert End
52. exit The following commands illustrate the status of the routers in the configuration example Accompanying each command is the output matching to the configuration example Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 173 Router R1 Status show vlan Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active IVL SVL Mgmt 1 VLAN 1 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL Yes Port Members 1 2 5 7 9 14 16 17 19 26 2 VLAN 2 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 3 4 8 18 5 VLAN 5 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 15 Total VLANs 3 show vlan ip 1 10001 10 100 111 200 255 255 255 0 00 11 F9 35 84 40 1 Enabled 2 10002 3 430 314 255 255 255 0 00 11 F9 35 84 41 2 Enabled 5 10005 10 10 10 1 255 255 255 0 00 11 F9 35 84 44 5 Enabled 255 255 255 0 00 11 F9 35 84 42 3 Enabled 255 255 255 0 00 11 F9 35 84 43 4 Enabled show ip ospf Router ID 1 1 1 1 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status True AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 2 External Link State Checksum 49786 0xc27a Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 427 New Link State Advertisements Received 811 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Ena
53. for this UDP listener In the case of a UDP listener that accepts datagrams for any IP interface associated with the node the value 0 0 0 0 is used LocalPort The local port number for this UDP listener End ECMP tab The ECMP tab is used to configure the Equal Cost Multipath ECMP feature on the switch To configure ECMP use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt IP from the Device Manager menu The IP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected 2 Select the ECMP tab This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 222 IP Routing Configuration and Management IP dialog ECMP tab tikas Aderans te tral rehe Routes at akt manans all ngersa vian an raana cert in Wor Carnertines rinta EYP foe al a 3 Using the provided fields configure ECMP These fields are outlined in the following table ECMP tab fields Field Description RoutingProtocol The routing protocol to be configured MaxPath The maximum number of ECMP paths assigned to the protocol 4 Click Apply End Routing Information Protocol RIP configuration This section describes the Java Device Manager procedures used to configure and manage the Routing Information Protocol RIP on the Nortel Ethernet Routing S
54. gt The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The lt interval gt parameter represents the advertisement interval in seconds This is an integer value between 1 and 255 The ip vrrp adver int command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 107 ip vrrp backup master command The ip vrrp backup master command is used to enable the VRRP backup master functionality The syntax of the ip vrrp backup master command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt backup master enable The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The ip vrrp backup master command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip vrrp backup master command The no ip vrrp backup master command is used to disable the VRRP backup master functionality The syntax of the no ip vrrp backup master command is no ip vrrp lt vr_id gt backup master enable The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The no ip vrrp backup master command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp critical ip command The ip vrrp critical ip command is used to enable the VRRP critical IP functionality The syntax of the ip vrrp critical ip command is ip vrrp l
55. i 0 214147483647 Prefix p address PrefixMaskLen 0 32 Name oo g MaskLenFrom 0 32 MaskLenUpto 0 32 Using the fields provided create a new prefix list These fields are described in the following table Insert Prefix List dialog fields Description The unique identifier of this prefix list The IP address associated with this prefix list Prefix PrefixMaskLen The subnet mask length associated with this prefix list Name The name associated with this prefix list MaskLenFrom The mask length from the stated subnet mask MaskLenUpto The mask length up to the stated subnet mask Click Insert End Prefix List deletion To delete a prefix list use the following procedure Deleting a Prefix List Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected Select an Id to delete Click Delete End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 267 Route Policy configuration The Route Policy tab is used to configure route policies on the switch Route policies are created and then applied to switch in either an accept in announce out or redistribution capacity To c
56. if required 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip listen disable 5 Enable Default Route Supply if a default route exists in the route table 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 124 IP Routing Configuration and Management 10 11 12 5530 24TFD config if ip rip default supply enable Enable Default Route Listen to add a default route to the route table if advertised from another router 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip default listen enable Add the In or Out Route Policy 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy mapl Enable Triggered Updates if required 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip triggered enable Configure the cost of the link by entering a value of 1 to 15 where 1 is the default 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip cost 2 Configure send mode parameters 5530 24TFD enable
57. illustrated below Insert Static Route screen 192 168 249 46 IP Insert Static Routes ie Metric fi 1 65535 IV Enable Close Help 3 In the fields provided enter the information for the new static route The following table outlines the fields on this screen Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 215 Insert Static Route fields Field Description The destination IP address of the route 0 0 0 0 is considered the default route Multiple routes to a single destination can appear in the table but access to such multiple entries is dependent on the table access mechanisms defined by the network management protocol in use Mask The destination mask of the route NextHop The IP address of the next hop of this route In the case of a route bound to an interface that is realized through a broadcast media the value of this field is the agent IP address on that interface This field represents the cost of the static route It is used to choose the best route the one with the smallest cost to a certain destination This field has a range of 1 to 65535 If this metric is not used the value is set to 1 Enable Enable the new static route 4 Click Insert The new static route is displayed on the Static Routes tab
58. in the connected VLAN is in the Link Up state This setting will take effect whenever the value is changed by the user or after the first Link Down transition The syntax of the ip rip advertise when down command is ip rip advertise when down enable Advertise when down functionality is disabled by default The ip rip advertise when down command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 70 IP Routing Configuration and Management no ip rip advertise when down command The ip rip advertise when down command is used to disable RIP advertisements on the interface being configured even when that interface is not operational The syntax of the no ip rip advertise when down command is no ip rip advertise when down enable The no ip rip advertise when down command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip auto aggregation command The ip rip auto aggregation command is used to enable auto aggregation on the RIP interface This allows for the automatic aggregation of routes to their natural net mask when they are advertised on an interface in a different class network The syntax of the ip rip auto aggregation command is ip rip auto aggregation enable Auto aggregation is disabled by default The ip rip auto aggregation command is execu
59. interfaces are not supported on brouters e aprimary IP interface must be in place before secondary IP interfaces can be added secondary interfaces must be deleted before you can delete the primary Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 19 If secondary interfaces are configured on the management VLAN routing cannot be disabled globally or on the management VLAN Secondary IP interfaces on the management VLAN are purged from NVRAM when e aunit leaves the stack and the switch does not have a manually configured IP e the switch fails to get the IP address through the BootP mode The following are not supported on secondary interfaces e DHCRP e Proxy ARP e UDP broadcast e IPFIX e VRRP OSPF RIP For information about configuring secondary interfaces on VLANs see IP routing using VLANs page 16 Brouter port The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the concept of brouter ports A brouter port is a single port VLAN that can route IP packets as well as bridge all non routable traffic The difference between a brouter port and a standard IP protocol based VLAN configured to do routing is that the routing interface of the brouter port is not subject to the spanning tree state of the port A brouter port can be in the blocking state for non routable traffic and still be able
60. is disabled by default Fast advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds ms with a default of 200 If fast VRRP advertisement is desired enable fast advertisement End Configuration command listing This following list is a complete sequence of the commands used in this configuration 1 Configuration for R1 MLT CONFIGURATION config t mlt 1 member 2 1 2 2 mlt 1 ena vlan port 2 2 2 2 tagging enable interface mlt 1 ist enable peer ip 2 1 1 2 vlan 3999 mlt 2 member 1 48 1 47 mlt 2 enable interface mlt 2 smlt 1 VLAN CONFIGURATION config t vlan members remove 1 1 47 1 48 2 1 2 2 vlan create 2 type port vlan members remove 2 1 1 1 46 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 2 1 47 1 48 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 2 ip address 10 1 20 2 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 20 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 201 router vrrp ena interface vlan 2 ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 ip vrrp 1 enable ip vrrp 1 backup master enable vlan create 3999 type port vlan members remove 3999 1 1 1 47 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 3999 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 3999 ip address 2 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 PORT CONFIGURATION PHASE II config t mlt spanning tree 1 stp a
61. manually e Configuring virtual link automatically The following is an example for creating an auto virtual link Creating auto virtual link R1 config router auto vlink Example 1 R1 config show ip ospf Router ID 1 0 0 0 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status True AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 0 External Link State Checksum 0 0x0 Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 67 New Link State Advertisements Received 722 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 34 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Enabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled R3 config router auto vlink Example 2 R3 config show ip ospf Router ID 3 0 1 0 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status True AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 0 External Link State Checksum 0 0x0 Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 67 New Link State Advertisements Received 722 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Enabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled The followin
62. metric 10 R3 config router show ip ospf host route Host IP Metric R3 config router The following is an example for deleting a host route Deleting Host Route Example 1 R3 config router no host route 11 11 11 111 R3 config router show ip ospf host route Host IP Metric R3 config router OSPF virtual link On an OSPF network a router acting as an area boundary router ABR must be directly connected to the backbone If no physical connection is available you can create a virtual link A virtual link is established between two endpoint ABRs and is a logical connection to the backbone area through a non backbone area called a transit area In the following diagram non backbone ABR 2 establishes a virtual link with backbone ABR1 across transition area area 1 The virtual link connects area 2 to area 0 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 32 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Virtual link diagram Area 0 Area 1 Area 2 Note Stub or NSSA areas cannot be transit areas A virtual link can be created manually or automatically Manual virtual link creation can conserve resources and provide specific control of virtual link placement in the OSPF configuration To add a virtual link manually configure both endpoint ABRs with a neighbor router ID and trans
63. min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 1001 ip address 172 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 2 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit ip arp timeout 360 ip dhcp relay ip blocking mode none Route Policies route map Allow permit 1 route map Allow 1 enable route map Allow 1 match protocol direct ospf no route map Allow 1 match interface route map Allow 1 match metric 0 no route map Allow 1 match network no route map Allow 1 match next hop route map Allow 1 match route type any no route map Allow 1 match route source no route map Allow 1 set injectlist route map Allow 1 set mask 0 0 0 0 route map Allow 1 set metric 5 route map Allow 1 set nssa pbit enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 164 IP Routing Configuration and Management route map Allow 1 set ip preference 0 I OSPF router ospf enable router ospf router id 1 1 1 3 as boundary router enable no trap enable timers basic holddown 10 rfc1583 compatibility enable default cost ethernet 100 default cost fast ethernet 10 default cost gig ethernet 1 default cost ten gig ethernet 1 area 0 0 0 0 import external area 0 0 0 0 import summaries enable area 0 0 0 3 import external area 0 0 0 3 import summaries enable redistrib
64. of the following types AdvertiseMatching Advertise the aggregate summary LSA with same LSID DoNotAdvertiseMatching Suppress all networks that fall within the entire range or AdvertiseDoNotAggregate Advertise individual networks AdvertiseMetric The advertisement metric associated with this aggregate Enter an integer value between 0 and 65535 which represents the Metric cost value for the OSPF area range 3 Click Apply End LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 252 IP Routing Configuration and Management Area Aggregate creation To create a new OSPF area aggregate follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Area Aggregate tab This tab is illustrated above 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Area Aggregate dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert Area Aggregate dialog 192 168 249 46 OSPF Insert Area Aggregate xi ArealD 0 0 0 0 x LsdbType C summarylink nssaExternalLink IpAddress Mask Effect advertiseMatching doNotAdvertiseMatching advertiseDoNotAggregate AdvertiseMetric 0 65535 Close Help 4 Using the fields provided create the new area aggregate These fields are described in the following table I
65. opens This dialog is illustrated below VRRP Stats dialog x Absoievat Cumsatve averagelsec Mnmum se Mavimanisee Lastvalie BecomeMaster AdvertiseRevd AdvertiseIntervalErrors o o t t InvalidTypePktsRevd AddressListErrors AuthFailures InvalidAuthType AuthTypeMismatch PacketLengthErrors OEE Clear Counters close Help Poll Interval ios X Oday 00h 00m 10s o 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 0 olojololololojlolololo ololololololojlolololo o o jolololojojojojojojo ojojojojojojojojojojo o 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 09 9 0 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 283 4 Using the provided fields view and graph the VRRP statistical information The following table outlines these fields VRRP Stats fields Field Description BecomeMaster The total number of times that this virtual router s state has transitioned to MASTER AdvertiseRcvd The total number of VRRP advertisements received by this virtual router AdvertiselntervalErrors The total number of VRRP advertisement packets received for which the advertisement interval is different than the one configured for the local virtual router Ip TtlErrors The total number of VRRP packets rec
66. parameter represents the virtual router being configured The lt priority value gt parameter represents the priority assigned to the virtual router This is a value between 1 and 255 The ip vrrp priority command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode show ip vrrp command The show ip vrrp command is used to display VRRP configuration information and statistics The syntax of the show ip vrrp command is show ip vrrp address interface Use either the address key word to display address related VRRP information or interface to display interface related VRRP information Using neither displays basic global configuration information The command is executed in the Global Configuration mode Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP commands The Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP feature allows routers to determine equal cost paths to the same destination prefix The multiple paths can be used for load sharing of traffic and allows faster convergence to other active paths in case of network failure This section describes the CLI commands used to configure ECMP on the switch Note ECMP is only supported on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5520 and 5530 ECMP will work in a mixed stack but will not run on any Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5510 units in the stack rip maximum path command The rip maximum path command is used to configure the number of ECMP paths allotted for the Routing Information Protocol RIP The syntax of the rip ma
67. query interval 125 vlan igmp 101 snooping disable vlan igmp 101 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 104 snooping disable vlan igmp 104 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan mgmt 1 1 MLT Phase 1 no mlt mlt 1 name Trunk 1 enable member 7 8 learning normal mlt 1 learning normal mlt 1 bpdu all ports mlt 1 loadbalance basic mlt 2 name Trunk 2 enable member 1 2 learning normal mlt 2 learning normal mlt 2 bpdu all ports mlt 2 loadbalance basic 1 STP Phase 2 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 1 spanning tree stp 3 add vlan 101 spanning tree stp 3 add vlan 104 spanning tree stp 3 enable interface FastEthernet ALL Sspanning tree port 3 6 9 26 learning normal spanning tree port 1 2 7 8 stp 3 learning normal spanning tree port 3 6 9 26 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree port 1 2 7 8 stp 3 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 timeout 120 no spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 enable exit 1 MLT Phase 2 mlt spanning tree 1 stp 3 learning normal mlt spanning tree 2 stp 3 learning normal l k k L3 no ip directed broadcast enable ip routing interface vlan 1 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 101 ip address 10 1 1 10 255 255 255 252 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 Au
68. rip 5530 24TFD config ip ospf apply redistribute direct 5530 24TFD config ip ospf apply redistribute static End Configuring ECMP for OSPF Usage of ECMP with OSPF is supported on the 5520 and 5530 models only To configure ECMP with OSPF use the following procedure Step Action 1 Log into User EXEC mode 5530 24TFD gt enable Log into Global Configuration mode 5530 24TFD config terminal The switch will respond with the following line Enter configuration commands one per line End with CNTL Z Set the number of ECMP paths to use with OSPF Up to four paths can be used 5530 24TFD config ospf maximum path 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 55 This command tells the router to use up to two paths to get to any OSPF network destination 4 The configuration can be verified using the following command 5530 24TFD config show ecmp End IP routing configuration using the CLI This section describes the various Command Line Interface commands available for the configuration and management of IP routing Depending on the type of command and the context in which it is being used these commands are executed in the various CLI command modes IP configuration commands This section describes the commands for the global IP con
69. specified in the lt ip_address gt parameter Omitting this parameter displays information for all OSPF areas Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 100 IP Routing Configuration and Management Command show ip ospf area range lt ip_address gt show ip ospf ase show ip ospf default show ip ospf default cost show ip ospf ifstats lt ip_address gt detail mismatch show ip ospf int auth show ip ospf int timers show ip ospf Isdb adv rtr lt ip_address gt area lt ip_address gt detail lt ip_address gt lsa type lt type gt Isid lt ip_address gt show ip ospf neighbor show ip ospf redistribute show ip ospf stats show ip ospf timer interface show ip ospf authentication interface show ip ospf interface show ip ospf virtual links show ip ospf timer virtual links show ip ospf authentication virtual links Description Displays configuration information about the OSPF area range specified in the lt ip_address gt parameter Omitting this parameter displays information for all OSPF area ranges Displays information about the OSPF Autonomous System external links state advertisements Displays OSPF default metrics associated with various port types Displays the default costs associated with various port types Displays OSPF interface
70. switches that are part of the 5500 Series of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switches 5500 Series Switch Platforms 5500 Series Switch Model Key Features Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 24 port 10 100 1GBase T Layer 4 5510 24T diffserv capable stackable Ethernet switch This switch contains two shared SFP ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 48 port 10 100 1GBase T Layer 4 5510 48T diffserv capable stackable Ethernet switch This switch contains two shared SFP ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 24 port 10 100 1GBase T Layer 4 5520 24T PWR diffserv capable stackable Ethernet switch with full Power over Ethernet PoE capability on all copper ports This switch contains four shared SFP ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 48 port 10 100 1GBase T Layer 4 5520 48T PWR diffserv capable stackable Ethernet switch with full Power over Ethernet PoE capability on all copper ports This switch contains four shared SFP ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch A 24 port 10 100 1GBase T Layer 4 5530 24TFD diffserv capable stackable Ethernet switch This switch contains twelve shared SFP ports and two XFP ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 10 Preface Related publications For more information about the management configuration and use of the Nortel Ethernet Rou
71. the CLI 59 LLL ee The syntax for the show vlan ip command is show vlan ip vid lt 1 4094 gt Substitute lt 1 4094 gt above with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to be displayed Static route commands This section discusses the commands used to display and configure static routes on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series show ip route static command The show ip route static command displays all static routes whether these routes are active or inactive The syntax for the show ip route static command is show ip route static lt A B C D gt s lt O P Q R gt lt W X Y Z gt The following table outlines the parameters for this command ip route static parameters Parameters Description lt A B C D gt Enter IP address to display the static route for the specific IP address s lt O P Q R gt Enter IP address for the subnet to display lt W X Y Z gt Enter subnet mask address for the subnet to display The show ip route static command is executed in the User EXEC command mode show ip route command The show ip route command displays all active routes in the routing table Route entries appear in ascending order of the destination IP addresses The syntax for the show ip route command is show ip route lt A B C D W X Y Z gt lt summary gt show ip route command output Ip Route DST MASK NEXT COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 3 2 137 1 1 1 21 S IB 5 2 2 2 0 255 2
72. the ability to divide an intranet into pieces that match network requirements Routing is based on the longest subnet mask or network that matches IP routing using VLANs The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports wire speed IP routing between virtual LANs VLAN This type of routing is also referred to as virtual routing When a virtual router interface is created for a specified VLAN a specific IP address is associated with the specific VLAN In this release the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports static routing in which the identifiers of the devices being routed between are entered manually This virtual router interface does not have an association with any specified port or set of ports it is called a virtual router interface because it is not associated with any particular port The VLAN IP address can be reached through any of the ports in the VLAN specified as a virtual router interface and the assigned IP address is the gateway through which packets are routed out of that VLAN Routed traffic can be forwarded to another VLAN within the switch or stack of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Once routing is enabled on two VLANs by assigning IP addresses routing can be performed between those two VLANs refer to IP routing with VLANs page 16 IP routing with VLANs VLAN 1 N IO 10 1 3 1 24 IP routing is enabled or disabled globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 550
73. the contents of the specified prefix list SetMask Indicates the mask to used for routes that pass the policy matching criteria 3 Click Apply End Route Policy creation To create a new route policy follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog will open with the Prefix List tab selected Select the Route Policy tab This tab is illustrated above 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Route Policy dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 270 IP Routing Configuration and Management Insert Route Policy dialog xi Id 0 2147483647 SequenceNumber 1 65535 Name O Enable Mode permit C deny MatchProtocol I direct static rip I ospf T any MatchNetwork af MatchIpRouteSource Do E MatchNextHop OoOo O B MatchiInterFace Do n i lt a C W OC rY z any C local internal MatchRouteType C external C externaltypel C externaltype2 MatchMetric jo 0 65535 NssaPbit enable C disable SetRoutePreference j 0 255 SetMetric fo 0 65535 SetMetricType C typel type SetInjectNetList SetMask l 4 Using the fields provided create the new route policy These fields are described in the follow
74. the specified ports Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP Routing Configuration and Management This chapter describes the configuration and management of IP routing in the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series IP Routing configuration is accomplished through the Command Line Interface CLI Web based Management Interface or the Java Device Manager JDM This chapter contains the following topics e IP routing initial configuration page 51 e IP routing configuration examples page 120 IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager page 206 IP routing initial configuration This section provides step by step instructions for the initial configuration of the IP routing protocols supported by the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series For conceptual information about IP routing topics covered in this section refer to An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols page 13 This section contains the following topics e Global IP routing configuration page 51 e Open Shortest Path First OSPF initial configuration page 52 This chapter also contains in depth configuration examples that can aid in the advanced configuration of the switch Refer to IP routing configuration examples page 120 for these advanced examples Global IP routing configuration Before I
75. to route IP traffic This feature removes any interruptions caused by Spanning Tree Protocol recalculations in routed traffic A brouter port is actually a one port VLAN therefore each brouter port decreases the number of available VLANs by one and uses one VLAN ID When a brouter port is created the following actions are also taking place on the switch e A port based VLAN is created e The brouter port is added to the new port based VLAN The PVID of the brouter port is changed to the VLAN ID of the new VLAN e The STP participation of the brouter port is disabled An IP address is assigned to the brouter VLAN Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 20 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Management VLAN Prior to Software Release 4 0 the Management VLAN was the only VLAN that was used to carry the management traffic including Telnet Web SNMP BootP and TFTP for the switch The Management VLAN always exists on the switch and cannot be removed All IP settings including switch IP address stack IP address subnet mask and default gateway apply only to the Management VLAN In this release of Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series a regular Layer 2 L2 VLAN behaves like a routable L3 VLAN if a pair of IP addresses and a MAC address are attached to the VLAN When routing is enabled in
76. were reports from any client connected to its ports and generates a consolidated proxy report to the designated router In this way the router receives a single consolidated report from that entire subnet After the switches learn which ports are requesting access to the IP Multicast stream all other ports not responding to the queries are blocked from receiving the IP Multicast 5500 Series switch filtering IP multicast streams 2 of 2 page 49 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IGMP snooping 49 5500 Series switch filtering IP multicast streams 2 of 2 membership _ el ee _ fa_ Internet d f A i Designated ae A router x N Da a a Ethe met Routing Switch 5500 Series Ethernet Routing Switch ries PeMssrsss stises ssieee sessie aa 28 28 f oko Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series a OF Multicast stream pl oial HOSEA The consolidated proxy report generated by the switch remains transparent to Layer 3 of the International Standardization Organization Open Systems Interconnection ISO OSI model The switch IP address and MAC address are not part of proxy report generation The last reporting IGMP group member in each VLAN represen
77. 0 0 0 2 import nssa 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 18 area 0 0 0 2 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5 Create a route policy named Rip_Dist that distributes directly connected and OSPF routes into RIP 5530 24TFD config route map Rip Dist permit 1 enable match protocol direct ospf set metric type typel 6 Apply route policy to RIP Out Policy 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 200 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy Rip Dist 7 Add two prefix lists 15net and 14net that are associated with the network addresses from the RIP version 2 network 5530 24TFD config ip prefix list 15net 15 15 15 0 24 5530 24TFD config ip prefix list 14net 14 14 14 0 24 8 Create a route policy named P_bit that sets the NSSA N P bit only for the prefix list named 15net 5530 24TFD config route map P bit permit 1 enable match network 15net set nssa pbit enable 5530 24TFD config route map P bit permit 2 enable match network 14net 5530 24TFD config no route map P bit 2 set nssa pbit enable 9 Configure OSPF route distribution to distribute RIP routes as AS external LSA Type 1 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router redistribute rip enable metric type typel route policy P bit 5530 24TFD config ip ospf apply redistribute rip End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Ne
78. 0 Series By default IP routing is disabled Note All IP routing parameters can be configured on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series before routing is actually enabled on the switch There is no longer a one to one correspondence between the physical port and the router interface because a given port can belong to multiple VLANs The VLANs may be configured for routing on the switch Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 17 As with any IP address virtual router interface addresses are also used for device management For management over IP any virtual router interface IP address can be used to access the switch as long as routing is enabled When the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch or stack is used without routing enabled the Management VLAN is reachable only through the switch or stack IP address With IP routing enabled on the switch or stack any of the virtual router IP interfaces can be used for management over IP Once routing is enabled on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switches the Management VLAN behaves like all other routable VLANs The IP address is reachable through any virtual router interface as long as a route is available Actually all virtual router interfaces can be used as the Management VLAN over IP Multinetting The Nortel
79. 0 to VLAN 2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 1 20 3 255 255 255 0 Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 20 3 Configure VRRP on VLAN 2 The VRRP VIP address of 10 1 21 1 is added to VLAN 2 using a VRID of 1 Note 1 For this example the VRRP priority value is set to 200 This allows router R2 to be elected as the VRRP master router Note 2 Fast advertisement is disabled by default Fast advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds ms with a default of 200 If fast VRRP advertisement is desired enable fast advertisement 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router vrrp ena 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 1 enable 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 1 priority 200 4 Configure VLAN 3 on router R2 a b Configure VLAN 3 on router R2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan create 3 type port Configure the ports for VLAN 3 on R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 3 1 14 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyrig
80. 03 NN47200 504 Instructions for the configuration of IP routing protocols on 5500 Series switches Instructions for the configuration and implementation of QoS and filtering on 5500 Series switches Instructions for the configuration NN47200 505 implementation and use of system monitoring on 5500 Series switches Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 5 1 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Standard 27 August 2007 Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site 11 Title Description Part Number Nortel Ethernet Provides an overview of new NN47200 400 Routing Switch 5500 features fixes and limitations of Series Release Notes the 5500 Series switches Also Release 5 1 included are any supplementary documentation and document errata Installing the Nortel Instructions for the installation and 217070 A Ethernet Redundant use of the Nortel Ethernet RPS 15 Power Supply 15 DC DC Converter Instructions for the installation and 215081 A Module for the use of the DC DC power converter Baystack 5000 Series Switch Nortel Ethernet Instructions for the installation and NN47200 302 Routing Switch 5500 use of SFP transceivers Series Release 5 1 Installation SFP You can access technical documentation online at the Nortel Technical Support web site located at http www nortel com support Use the following procedure to acce
81. 07 Creating a Layer 3 routable VLAN Note The creation of a Management VLAN in the JDM requires the assignment of an IP address to a VLAN Ensure that IP forwarding is turned on before proceeding To enable IP forwarding on the switch follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the IP dialog by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the Device Manager menu The IP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected This tab is illustrated below IP dialog Globals tab has Addresses Ro tes Stati Routes ARP ARP tertaces ARP Inpecion VLAN A2 Inspectior po z TEF CP Con ectio s JD Lezene s COMP Foard forward g C nat ferwerdrg DefaukTTL 54 Reesnimenit iiser ARPT Time 260 5 38008 en 2 In the Forwarding section select the forwarding option 3 Click Apply End With IP forwarding enabled on the switch the creation of a Layer 3 Routable VLAN can proceed To create a Layer 3 Routable VLAN follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the VLANs screen by selecting VLAN gt VLANs from the JDM menu 2 Select the VLAN for Management VLAN assignment 3 Click IP The IP VLAN screen opens with the IP Address tab selected This screen and tab are illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 208 IP Routing Configuration and Management IP VLAN scre
82. 07 Nortel Networks 246 IP Routing Configuration and Management End OSPF Hosts information Use the Hosts tab of the OSPF dialog to view virtual neighbor information Use the following procedure to view OSPF Hosts information Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog opens 2 Select the Hosts tab The Hosts tab illustration follows Hosts tab 192 167 120 9 052 x General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces If Metrics Neighbors Area Aggregate Redistribute Message Digest Virtual IF Message Digest Stats Virtual IF Virtual Neighbors Hosts Link State Database Ext Link State Database a es 3 Use the fields on the tab as described in the following table to view the Hosts information Hosts fields Field Description IpAddress Specifies the host IP address TOS Specifies the configured route type of service TIP the value in this field should be 0 as TOS based routing is not supported Metric Specifies the configured cost of the host ArealD Specifies the ID of the area connected to the host 4 Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to refresh the information in the view insert or delete information copy settings export information to an external file or print End OSPF Host creation To create an OSPF host use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configurati
83. 1 3 Add the route policy created in step 2 to both RIP core ports 5530 24TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 1 5530 24TFD config if brouter vlan 2091 subnet 10 1 1 14 30 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy rip pol 1 5530 24TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 8 5530 24TFD config if brouter vlan 2090 subnet 10 1 1 6 30 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy rip pol 1 End To limit the advertising of routes using the announce policy from the routing table a route policy should be created to deny the route To configure the RIP announce policy with a limited announce policy on ERS3 use the following configuration steps Step Action 1 Configure the IP prefix list named Prefix_2 with the IP address 10 1 240 0 5530 24TFD config ip prefix list Prefix 2 10 1 240 0 20 ge 20 le 20 2 Configure the IP route policy named rip_pol_2 with match criteria using the IP prefix configured in Step 1 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 2 deny 1 enable match network Prefix 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 134 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 2 1 match network Prefix 2 3 Add the Route Policy created in step 2 to both RIP core ports 5530 24TFD config interfac
84. 1 2 pvid 104 vlan ports 3 6 pvid 1 vlan ports 7 8 pvid 103 vlan ports 9 pvid 1 vlan ports 10 pvid 1001 vlan ports 11 12 pvid 1 vlan ports 13 14 pvid 105 vlan ports 15 26 pvid 1 vlan igmp unknown mcast no flood disable vlan igmp 1 snooping disable vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 162 IP Routing Configuration and Management vlan igmp 103 snooping disable vlan igmp 103 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 104 snooping disable vlan igmp 104 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 105 snooping disable vlan igmp 105 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 1001 snooping disable vlan igmp 1001 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan mgmt 1 MLT Phase 1 no mlt mlt 1 name Trunk 1 enable member 7 8 learning normal mlt 1 learning normal mlt 1 bpdu all ports mlt 1 loadbalance basic mlt 2 name Trunk 2 enable member 1 2 learning normal mlt 2 learning normal mlt 2 bpdu all ports mlt 2 loadbalance basic mlt 4 name Trunk 4 enable member 13 14 learning normal mlt 4 learning normal mlt 4 bpdu all ports mlt 4 loadbalance basic 1 STP Phase 2 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 1 spanning tree stp 3 add vlan 103 spanning tree s
85. 10 1 1 0 30 Legend Ve Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 To replicate the above configuration example using the key ID 2 and key value qwsdf89 perform the following steps Step Action 1 Configure MD5 authentication on R1 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf message digest key 2 md5 qwsdf89 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf primary md5 key 2 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf authentication type message digest 2 Configure MD5 authentication on R2 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf message digest key 2 md5 qwsdf89 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf primary md5 key 2 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf authentication type message digest End Configuring OSPF network types OSPF network types were created to allow OSPF neighboring between routers over different types of network infrastructures With this feature each interface can be configured to support the various network types In the example configuration illustrated below VLAN 2 on Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series R1 is configured for OSPF with the interface type field value set as passive Because VLAN 2 is set as passive OSPF hello messages are not sent on this segment although R1 continues to advertise this interface to the remaining OSPF network Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007
86. 111 1111 1111 20 bit mask Therefore the network address to use for this example is 10 1 240 0 20 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 131 Accept policy configuration pone VLAN 2 a ERS2 143 _ 1 10 1 20 004 I 7 40 1 20 0 24 L 1 48 10 1 1 030 2 a 2H 10 1 1 8 30 10 1 1 4 30 10 1 1 12 30 Network core l 10 1 40 0 24 R1 route table 10 1 1 0 30 Local 10 1 30 0 24 10 1 1 4 30 Local 10 1 1 0 30 Routes removed by 10 1 20 0 24 Local 10 1 240 0 24 using the RIP accept 240 10 1 241 0 24 Cost 1 Policy 10 1 243 0 24 Cost 1 10 1 240 0 20 RIP 10 1 30 0 24 Legend is Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Use the following steps to recreate the above configuration example Step Action 1 Configure the IP prefix list on ERS1 Create a prefix list named Prefix_1 with an IP range from 10 1 240 0 to 10 1 255 0 5530 24TFD config ip prefix list Prefix 1 10 1 240 0 20 ge 20 le 32 2 Configure the route policy named rip_pol_1 with match criteria using the IP prefix configured in step 1 This injects one route of 10 1 240 0 20 into the route table 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 11 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 1 1 enable 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 1 permit 1 enable 5530 24TFD config rout
87. 14 0 30 20 1 1 0 30 Aa 10 1 1 16 30 15 15 15 0 30 E 1 20 ia 2 6 fates ey ASBR 1 1 1 2 NSSA Area 2 Area 0 Legend t Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 To configure the example illustrated above follow this procedure Step Action 1 Configure router R1 a Configure the RIP interface on R1 Configure port 1 20 as a brouter port in VLAN 100 and enable RIP on this interface 5530 24TFD config interface fast 1 20 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 1 20 vlan 100 subnet 20 1 1 2 30 5530 24TFD config router rip 5530 24TFD config router network 20 1 1 2 b Enable RIP globally and configure the RIP version 2 interface 5530 24TFD config router rip enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 144 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 100 5530 24TFD config if ip rip receive version rip2 send version rip2 c Configure the OSPF interface on R1 Configure port 2 6 as a brouter port in VLAN 200 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 6 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 6 vlan 200 subnet 10 1 1 18 30 d Enable OSPF on R1 Configure R1 as an ASBR assign OSPF Router ID 1 1 1 5 create OSPF NSSA area 2 add the OSPF interface 10 1 1 18 to area 2 and enable OSPF on the interface 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router as boundar
88. 2 31 20 1 00 E0 16 000001 ARP request a 1 _ 172 31 20 1 I L eet mn 00 00 00 00 00 00 Host A Host B Host C Host D 172 31 1 1 12 172 31 1 20 16 172 31 20 1 24 172 31 20 50 16 00 20 00 000001 0020 00 00 0020 00 210000 0001 0021 00 0000 02 Legend i Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Static routes Once routable VLANs are created though IP address assignment static routes can be created Static routes allow for the manual creation of specific routes to a destination IP address Static routes can also be used to specify a route to all networks for which there are no explicit routes in the Forwarding Information Base or the routing table This static default route is a route to the network address 0 0 0 0 as defined by the IEEE RFC 1812 standard Because of their static nature this type of solution is not scalable Thus in a large or growing network this type of route management may not be desirable Also static routes do not have the capacity to determine the failure of paths Thus a router can still attempt to use a path after it has failed Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 23 Non local static routes The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the usage of non local static routes A non local static route is almost identical to a static rout
89. 2 and 8 are associated with ERS1 RIP configuration example eo ERS1 ERS2 a ay bi 1 5 A ay as i Cand ie VLAN 3 802 10 Tagged trunk Legend Network core 10 1 1 0 30 brouter port E Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 E Vee Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Layer 2 Mode VLAN2 VLAN3 For the purposes of this example e ERS1 is an edge switch with two configured VLANs VLAN 2 and 3 Itis connected to aggregation switch ERS2 on ports 1 47 and 1 48 e Port 2 7 of ERS2 is configured as a brouter port with RIP to connect to the network core Use the following procedure to configure router ERS 2 and reproduce the illustrated RIP configuration Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 126 IP Routing Configuration and Management Step Action 1 Configure tagging on ports 1 47 and 1 48 Tagging is required to support multiple VLANs on the same interface 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan ports 1 47 48 tagging tagAll 2 Configure ERS2 for VLAN 2 access a Create a port based VLAN VLAN 2 using spanning tree group 1 and include ports 1 47 and 1 48 in VLAN 2 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 name VLAN 2 type port 5530 24TFD config vlan member add 2 port 1 47 48 b Assign the IP address 10 1 20 2 24 to VLAN 2
90. 203 100 54 Area ID 0 0 0 0 Admin State Disabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 show ip ospf neighbor Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm 10 1 1 10 1 1 1 2 10 1 1 9 50 Full 0 Dyn 10 1 1 26 1 1 1 3 10 1 1 25 1 Full 0 Dyn Total OSPF Neighbors 2 show ip route Ip Route DST MASK NEXT COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF 172 2 2 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 25 10 104 T 2 O IB 120 172 3 3 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 9 30 101 T 1 O IB 25 172 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 25 20 104 T 2 O IB 20 20 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 25 10 104 T 2 O IB 120 10 1 1 16 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 9 20 101 T 1 O IB 25 10 1 1 20 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 9 20 101 T 1 O IB 25 10 1 1 24 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 26 1 104 C DB 0 10 1 1 8 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 10 1 101 C DB 0 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 25 20 104 T 2 O IB 20 Total Routes 9 TYPE Legend I Indirect Route D Direct Route A Alternative Route B Best Route E Ecmp Route U Unresolved Route N Not in HW Router R5 Status Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 186 IP Routing Configuration and Management show vlan Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active IVL SVL Mgmt 1 VLAN 1 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL Ye
91. 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 20 2 Configure VRRP on VLAN 2 The VRRP VIP address of 10 1 20 1 is added to VLAN 2 using a VRID of 1 Note 1 The VRRP priority is not configured here it is left at factory default of 100 Instead the priority setting on router R2 will be set to a higher value when R2 is configured Note 2 Fast advertisement is disabled by default Fast advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds ms with a default of 200 If fast VRRP advertisement is desired enable fast advertisement Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 193 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router vrrp ena 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 1 enable 2 Configure VLAN 3 on router R1 a Configure VLAN 3 on router R1 using spanning tree group 1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD vlan create 3 type port Configure the ports for VLAN 3 on R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 3 1 14 Configure an IP address for VLAN 3 Add IP address 10 1 21 2 255 255 255 0 to VLAN 3
92. 255 Ip ddr n Insert Close Help Using the provided fields create the new interface These fields are outlined in the following table Insert Interface Address dialog fields Field Description IfIndex The interface index to assign to the new interface Click the button at the end of the field to select a previously configured interface Otherwise enter an index value directly Vrid The virtual router ID to assign to this interface pAddr The IP address to assign to this interface Status The status of the interface active or inactive Click Insert End VRRP Interface deletion To delete a VRRP interface use the following procedure Deleting a VRRP interface Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears 2 Select VRRP The VRRP window opens 3 Select the Interface Address tab The Interface Address window opens 4 Select an Iflndex to delete 5 Click Delete End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 280 IP Routing Configuration and Management VRRP interface management The Interfaces tab is used to manage VRRP interfaces created on the Interface Address tab To manage VRRP interfaces use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt VRRP from the Device Manager menu
93. 30 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 2 4 Make R1 the ASBR Configure R1 as an ASBR and assign the OSPF Router ID 5530 24TFD config router ospf Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 149 5530 24TFD config router as boundary router enable 5530 24TFD config router router id 1 1 1 3 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5 Configure OSPF route distribution Configure OSPF route distribution to import RIP into OSPF The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series distributes the RIP routes as AS external LSA LSA type 5 using external metric type 1 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router redistribute rip enable metric 10 metric type typel 5530 24TFD config ip ospf apply redistribute rip 6 Configure a route policy A route policy is required for OSPF to RIP route redistribution After the route policy is created apply it to the RIP interface The following command creates a route policy named allow which distributes both direct and OSPF interfaces 5530 24TFD config route map allow permit 1 enable match protocol direct ospf 7 Apply the route policy to the RIP Out Policy The following commands apply the route policy created in step 6 to RIP interface 10 1 1 41 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 100 5530 24TFD config if i
94. 47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 273 Applying OSPF policies The Applying Policy tab is used to apply configured OSPF policies to the switch To configure policy application perform the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected Select the Applying Policy tab This tab is illustrated below Policy dialog Applying Policy tab x Prefix List Route Policy OSPF Accept RIP In Out Policy I OspfinFilterApply OSPF accept policies 7 RedistributeApply OSPF redistribute OspfApplyRedistribute none direct static C rip Appl Refresh Chose Help After Apply Ok click Refresh first before next policy apply 2 Using the fields provided select the policies to be applied These fields are described in the following table Applying Policy tab fields Field Description OspfInFilterApply Select this check box to apply OSPF accept policies RedistributeApply Select this check box to apply OSPF redistribution policies OspfApplyRedistribute If applying OSPF redistribution policies select the type of redistribution from the available options 3 Click Apply End OSPF Accept Policy configuration The OSPF Accept tab is used to configure OSPF accept poli
95. 4TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 7 5530 24TFD config if brouter vlan 2090 subnet 10 1 1 1 30 Note Usage of the brouter command above requires the usage of Variable Length Subnetting Usage of a dotted decimal subnet mask is not allowed b Enable RIP on the interface 5530 24TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 7 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5 Enable IP routing and RIP globally 5530 24TFD config ip routing 5530 24TFD config router rip enable End A list of the commands used to create this configuration can be displayed using the show running config command Using this command on ERS2 would list the following commands I VLAN vlan igmp unknown mcast no flood disable vlan configcontrol strict auto pvid vlan name 1 VLAN 1 vlan create 2 name VLAN 2 type port vlan create 3 name VLAN 3 type port vlan members 2 1 47 48 vlan members 3 1 47 48 RIP router rip router rip enable timers basic holddown 120 timers basic timeout 180 update 30 default metric 8 network 10 1 20 2 network 10 1 30 2 network 10 1 1 1 interface vlan 2 no ip rip listen enable no ip rip supply enable LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 128 IP Routing Configuration and Management interface vlan 3 no ip rip listen enable no ip rip supply enable 1 Bro
96. 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 310 Configuring IGMP using Web based management IGMP VLAN Configuration screen Application gt IGMP VLAN Configuration IGMP VLAN Setting VLAN 1 Snooping Disabled z Proxy Disabled z Robust Value Ro 255 Query Time fi2s seconds 1 66595 Static Router Ports Version 1 123 45 6 7 8 Y 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Port All 25 wim wj j m m m m ee mja Static Router Ports Version 2 123 45 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Port All 5 2 a a EEEE m lt 3 In the fields provided in the IGMP VLAN Setting window configure IGMP for the VLAN The following table outlines the fields in this window IGMP VLAN Setting fields Field Description VLAN The number assigned to the VLAN when the VLAN was created Snooping Select to enable or disable the IGMP snooping feature Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN field The default setting is Disabled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Configuring IGMP using the Web based Management Interface 311 Description Select to enable or disable the Proxy feature This feature lets the switch to consolidate IGMP Host Membership Reports received on its downs
97. 55 255 0 2 2 2 2 1 2 ae C DB 0 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 60 IP Routing Configuration and Management 10 3 2 0 255 255 255 0 10 3 2 199 1 1 C DB 0 Total Routes 3 TYPE Legend I Indirect Route D Direct Route A Alternative Route B Best Route E Ecmp Route U Unresolved Route N Not in HW The following table outlines the parameters for this command show ip route parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Enter IP address to display the route for the specific IP address lt W X Y Z gt Enter subnet mask address for the subnet to display summary Display a summary of IP route information The show ip route command is executed in the User EXEC command mode show ip route summary command The show ip route summary command displays the software IP routing table The syntax for the show ip route summary command is show ip route summary show ip route summary command output Connected routes 65 Static routes 2 RIP routes 512 OSPF routes 512 Total routes 1091 The show ip route summary command is executed in the User EXEC command mode ip route command The ip route command creates and configures a static route The syntax for the ip route command is ip route lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt lt O P Q R gt lt 1 65535 gt The following table ou
98. 7 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 106 IP Routing Configuration and Management The ip vrrp address command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip vrrp address command The no ip vrrp address command is used to delete the association of an IP address with a virtual router ID The syntax of the no ip vrrp address command is no ip vrrp address lt vr_id gt lt ip address gt The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured This is a value between 1 and 255 The lt ip_ address gt parameter represents the address to be used in the association The no ip vrrp address command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp action command The ip vrrp action command is used to define the action this interface will take when a holddown timer threshold has been reached The syntax of the ip vrrp action command is ip vrrp action lt vr_id gt none preempt The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured If none is selected as the action no action is taken when a holddown timer threshold is reached If preempt is selected as the action the holddown timer is cancelled The ip vrrp action command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp adver int command The ip vrrp adver int command is used to set the VRRP advertisement interval The syntax of the ip vrrp adver int command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt adver int lt interval
99. 8 vlan members add 2 1 15 interface vlan 2 ip address 10 1 20 2 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 20 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 196 IP Routing Configuration and Management router vrrp ena interface vlan 2 ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 ip vrrp 1 enable vlan create 3 type port interface vlan 3 ip address 10 1 21 2 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 21 2 router vrrp ena interface vlan 3 ip vrrp address 2 10 1 21 1 ip vrrp 2 priority 200 ip vrrp 2 enable 2 VLAN Configuration for Router R2 config t vlan create 2 type port vlan members remove 2 1 1 1 14 2 1 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 2 1 15 interface vlan 2 ip address 10 1 20 3 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 20 3 router vrrp ena interface vlan 2 ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 ip vrrp 1 priority 200 ip vrrp 1 enable vlan create 3 type port vlan members remove 3 1 1 1 14 1 15 2 1 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 3 1 14 interface vlan 3 ip address 10 1 21 3 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 21 3 router vrrp ena interface vlan 3 ip vrrp address 2 10 1 21 1 ip vrrp 2 enable Configuring VRRP with SMLT This configuration example shows how you can provide high availability for a Layer 2 edge switch feeding into a
100. 95 Insert Broadcast Interfaces dialog fields Field Description LocallfAddr The IP address of the local interface UdpPortFwdListld The port forwarding lists associated with the interface This ID is defined in the Forwarding Lists tab MaxTtl Indicates the maximum number of hops an IP broadcast packet can take from the source device to the destination device This is an integer value between 1 and 16 BroadCastMask The subnet mask of the local interface that is used for broadcasting the UDP broadcast packets 5 Click Insert End UDP broadcast interface deletion To delete a UDP broadcast interface use the following procedure Deleting a UDP broadcast interface Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP routing menu appears 2 Select UDP Forwarding The UDP Forwarding dialog opens 3 Select the Broadcast Interfaces tab The Broadcast Interfaces window opens 4 Select a LocallfAddr to delete 5 Click Delete End DHCP configuration The following topics describe DHCP configuration using the Device Manager Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 296 IP Routing Configuration and Management DHCP Relay Use the DHCP relay tab to view and configure the DHCP settings for the switch To view the DHCP Relay tab select IP
101. B C D gt Specifies the transit area Id expressed as an IP address lt W X Y Z gt Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP address authentication key Specifies the unique identifier assigned to the authentication key The no area virtual link command is executed in the Router Configuration mode area virtual link message digest key command Use the area virtual link message digest key command to create a virtual interface message digest key The syntax for the area virtual link message digest key command is area virtual link message digest key lt A B C D gt lt A B C D 0 32 gt lt 1 255 gt md5 key lt WORD gt area virtual link message digest key command parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Specifies the transit area Id expressed as an IP address lt W X Y Z gt Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP address lt 1 255 gt Specifies the primary MD5 key value expressed as an integer from 1 255 md5 key lt WORD gt Specifies the user selected key used to encrypt OSPF protocol packets for transmission The area virtual link message digest key command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no area virtual link message digest key command Use the no area virtual link message digest key command to delete a virtual interface message digest key The syntax for the no area virtual link message digest key command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series
102. Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 95 no area virtual link message digest key lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt lt 1 255 gt no area virtual link message digest key command parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Specifies the transit area ID expressed as an IP address lt W X Y Z gt Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP address lt 1 255 gt Specifies the primary MD5 key value expressed as an integer from 1 255 The no area virtual link message digest key command is executed in the Router Configuration mode auto vlink command Use the auto vlink command to enable global automatic Virtual Link creation For more information about Virtual Link see OSPF virtual link page 31 The syntax for the auto vlink command is auto vlink The auto vlink command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no auto vlink command Use the no auto vlink command to disable global automatic Virtual Link creation The syntax for the no auto vlink command is no auto vlink The no auto vlink command is executed in the Router Configuration mode ip ospf advertise when down command The ip ospf advertise when down command is used to enable advertisement of the OSPF interface even when the interface is operationally unavailable The syntax of the ip ospf advertise whe
103. Device Manager 281 AdminState Priority MasterlpAddr Indicates the administrative status of the virtual router Indicates the priority to be used for the virtual router master election process This is an integer value between 1 and 255 The priority value for the VRRP router that owns the IP addresses associated with the virtual router must be 255 The default priority value for VRRP routers backing up a virtual router is 100 Indicates the master router s real primary IP address This is the IP address listed as the source in the VRRP advertisement last received by this virtual router Advertisemenitinterval VirtualRouterUpTime HolddownTimer HoldDownState Indicates the time interval in seconds between transmission of advertisement messages Only the master router sends VRRP advertisements This is an integer value between 1 and 255 The default value is 1 Indicates the amount of time this virtual router has spent out of the initialize state The amount of time in seconds to wait before preempting the current VRRP master This is an integer value between 0 and 21600 The holddown state of this VRRP interface HoldDownTimeRemaining Action CriticallpAddrEnabled CriticallpAddr The amount of time in seconds left before the holddown timer will expire Used to trigger an action on this VRRP interface Options available are none no action or preemptHoldDownTimer Indicates wh
104. F route redistribution completely The syntax of the no redistribute command is redistribute lt route type gt enable route policy lt policy name gt The parameters for this command are listed below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 91 no redistribute parameters Parameters Description lt route_type gt The type of route to be configured Valid options are direct rip and static lt policy_name gt The route policy to remove from the route redistribution This is the name of an existing route policy The no redistribute command is executed in the Router Configuration mode rfc1583 compatibility command The r c1583 compatibility command is used to enable compatibility for RFC 1583 in the switch OSPF implementation The syntax of the rfc1583 compatibility command is rfc1583 compatibility enable The r c1583 compatibility command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no rfc1583 compatibility command The no rfc1583 compatibility command is used to disable compatibility for RFC 1583 in the switch OSPF implementation The syntax of the no rfc1583 compatibility command is no rfc1583 compatibility enable The no r c1583 compatibility command is executed in the Router Configuration mode router id command The rou
105. FD config router router id 1 1 1 2 5530 24TFD config router area 0 0 0 2 import noexternal 5530 24TFD config router no area 0 0 0 2 import summary enable 5530 24TFD config router area 0 0 0 2 default cost 10 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 17 area 0 0 0 2 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 143 Not So Stubby Areas NSSA Similar to stub areas the not so stubby area NSSA can also prevent the flooding of AS External Link State advertisements into the NSSA by replacing them with a default route However NSSA can also import small stub non OSPF routing domains into OSPF This allows the NSSA to import external routes such as RIP routes and then advertise these routes throughout the network External routing information is imported into NSSA by using type 7 LSAs These LSAs are translated at the NSSA boundary into LSA type 5 The N P bit in the type 7 LSA Options field indicates whether the type 7 LSA must be translated Only those LSAs with the N P bit set are translated The NSSA configuration example illustrated below demonstrates a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series configured as a NSSA ASBR router NSSA configuration example R3 21 11 15 10 1 1 20 30 RIPv2 2 1 22 14 14
106. HCP Snooping VLAN tab PP ayeres 1209 DH B DHU icky uher snzopna DHCP Siwupny LAN p srooana zort VHO zinzincs I sosro Guarz port I bores Guare cddases aeaaaee 3ronis 3 Select a Vlanld 4 To change the status double click the DhcpSnoopingEnabled box for the VLAN 5 Select true or false 6 Click Apply End DHCP Snooping port To view DHCP Snooping information for ports use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP window appears 2 Select the DHCP Snooping port tab The DHCP Snooping port window appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 299 DHCP Snooping port tab zj D c Relzy ZHCP snoopng DHCP Sncopng VLEN DI CP S ooping 2oit HCP Bindings tP Source Gustd por 12 Scurce G Latd accresses Par DxpSrcopnol T asted 1 fake efor en Sco 25 ons Select a port To change the status double click the DnhcpSnoopinglfTrusted box for the port Note The DhcpSnoopinglfTrusted field value is used to control whether this interface is trusted for DHCP snooping purposes Select true or false Click Apply End DHCP bindings To view information about learned DHCP bindings use the fo
107. HT o 9 9 09 090 090 09 090 0 o Buf ferFreeFailures amme Ba Clear Counters Close Help Poll Interval fios v 0day 00h 01m 14s 2 Using the fields provided view the OSPF statistics These fields are described in the table below Stats tab fields Field Description LsdbTblSize Indicates the number of entries in the link state database TxPackets Indicates the number of packets transmitted by OSPF RxPackets Indicates the number of packets received by OSPF TxDropPackets Indicates the number of packets dropped by OSPF before transmission RxDropPackets Indicates the number of packets dropped before receipt by OSPF RxBadPackets Indicates the number of bad packets received SpfRuns Indicates the total number of SPF calculations performed This also includes the number of partial route table calculations BuffersAllocated Indicates the total number of buffers allocated for OSPF Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 262 IP Routing Configuration and Management BuffersFreed Indicates the total number of buffers that are freed by OSPF BufferAllocFailures Indicates the number of times that OSPF has failed to allocate buffers BufferFreeFailures Indicates the number of times that OSPF has failed to allocate buffers Values on the Stats tab will refresh aut
108. IP routing configuration examples 175 Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 10 1 1 2 1 Full 0 Dyn 10 1 1 21 1 1 1 2 10 1 1 22 50 Full 0 Dyn Total OSPF Neighbors 2 show ip route Ip Route DST MASK NEXT COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF 172 2 2 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 2 10 103 T 1 O IB 120 172 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 2 20 103 T 1 O IB 20 172 3 3 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 22 30 102 T 2 O IB 25 20 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 2 10 103 T 1 O IB 120 10 1 1 24 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 2 20 103 T 1 O IB 20 10 1 1 20 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 21 1 102 C DB 0 10 1 1 16 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 22 20 102 T 2 O IB 25 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 1 1 103 C DB 0 10 1 1 8 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 2 30 103 T 1 O IB 20 Total Routes 9 TYPE Legend I Indirect Route D Direct Route A Alternative Route B Best Route E Ecmp Route U Unresolved Route N Not in HW Router R2 Status show vlan Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active IVL SVL Mgmt 1 VLAN 1 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL Yes Port Members 1 26 100 VLAN 100 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 5 6 101 VLAN 101 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 7 8 102 VLAN 102 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 1 2 show vlan ip Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 176 IP Routing Configuration and Management
109. IP tab xl SPF Stats Poison E disable enable J DefaultSupply J DefaultListen J AutoAggregateEnable J AdvertiseWhenDown Cost 1 115 Appl Refresh chose Help 4 Using the provided fields configure the interface RIP parameters These fields are outlined in the following table RIP tab fields Field Description Poison Determines whether or not poison reverse is implemented on this interface DefaultSupply Determines whether or not the interface implements the default supply mechanism DefaultListen Determines whether or not the interface implements the default listen mechanism AutoAggregateEnable Determines whether or not auto aggregation is enabled on this interface AdvertiseWhenDown Determines whether or not this interface will advertise even when non operational Cost The cost associated with this interface 5 Click Apply End Open Shortest Path First OSPF configuration The Open Shortest Path First OSPF Protocol is an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP that distributes routing information between routers belonging to a single autonomous system AS Intended for use in large networks OSPF is a link state protocol which supports IP subnetting and the tagging of externally derived routing information Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks
110. Management VLAN 20 Setting IP routing 20 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 21 Static routes 22 Non local static routes 23 Routing Information Protocol RIP 23 Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol 27 Route policies 35 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 37 Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP 38 UDP broadcast forwarding 38 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Bootstrap Protocol BootP 39 Avoiding duplicate IP addresses 44 IP blocking 45 IGMP snooping 46 IGMP snooping configuration rules 49 IP Routing Configuration and Management 51 IP routing initial configuration 51 Global IP routing configuration 51 Open Shortest Path First OSPF initial configuration 52 IP routing configuration using the CLI 55 IP configuration commands 55 Layer 3 routable VLANs 56 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 8 Contents Static route commands 59 Address Resolution Protocol ARP commands 64 Proxy ARP commands 66 Routing Information Protocol RIP commands 67 Open Shortest Path First OSPF commands 82 Route policy commands 101 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP commands 104 Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP commands 110 Brouter port commands 112 UDP broadcast forwarding commands 113 DHCP relay commands 115 IP routing configuration examples 120 Address Resolution Protocol ARP configuration 120 Routing
111. Metrcs Neighbors Virtual IF Virtual Neighbors Hosts Ares Roukerid IpAddr Options State Events RetransQlen HaloSuporessed see E B ee ev 3 Use the fields on the tab as described in the following table to view the Virtual Neighbors information Virtual Neighbors tab fields Field Description Area Specifies the subnetwork in which the virtual neighbor resides Routerld Specifies the 32 bit integer represented as a type IpAddress uniquely identifying the neighboring router in the autonomous system pAddr Specifies the IP address of the virtual neighboring router Options Specifies a bit mask corresponding to the option field of the neighbor State Specifies the state of the Virtual Neighbor Relationship Events Specifies the number of state changes or error events that have occurred between the OSPF router and the neighbor router RetransQLen Specifies the current length of the retransmission queue the number of elapsed seconds between advertising retransmissions of the same packet to a neighbor HelloSuppressed Specifies whether Hello packets to the virtual neighbor are suppressed or not 4 Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to refresh the information in the view insert information copy settings or print Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 20
112. Nortel Networks 138 IP Routing Configuration and Management OSPF network example I 1723 Area 0 gt L04 r R1 VLAN 2 10 1 1 20 30 OSPF network 1 2 10 14 14 21 172 3 1 1 Legend brouter port E Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 To create the configuration illustrated above for router R1 use the following commands 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 type port 5530 24TFD config vlan mem add 2 1 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 172 3 1 1 255 255 255 0 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf network passive The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the following types of networks e Broadcast Automatically discovers every OSPF router on the network by sending OSPF hellos to the multicast group AllSPFRouters 224 0 0 5 Neighboring is automatic and requires no configuration This interface type is typically used in an Ethernet environment e Passive Allows interface network to be included in OSPF without generating LSAs or forming adjacencies Typically used on an access network or on an interface that is used for BGP peering This also limits the amount of CPU cycles required to process the OSPF routing algorithm Configuring OSPF areas In large networks with many routers and networks the link state database LSDB and routing table can become very large Large route tables and link state databases LSDB consume memory The processing of link state advert
113. P routing configuration can take place IP routing must be globally enabled on the switch Use the set of commands outlined below to enter the Global Configuration mode of the switch and enable IP routing 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config ip routing Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 52 IP Routing Configuration and Management Open Shortest Path First OSPF initial configuration This section contains the steps necessary for the initial configuration of OSPF on the switch More advanced configuration examples can be found in the IP routing configuration examples page 120 section Basic OSPF configuration A basic OSPF configuration will learn OSPF routes from other OSPF devices and propagate routes to other OSPF devices The following procedure outlines the creation of a basic OSPF configuration Step Action 1 Log into User EXEC mode 5530 24TFD gt enable Log into Global Configuration mode 5530 24TFD config terminal The switch will respond with the following line Enter configuration commands one per line End with CNTL Z Enable IP routing globally 5530 24TFD config ip routing Enable OSPF globally 5530 24TFD config router ospf en Log into the OSPF router configuration mode It is not necessary to make any changes at this time but ente
114. RIP learned routes e Static routes This quick reference will help in the configuration of OSPF to import these types of routes This will allow the rest of the OSPF network to learn them as OSPF routes To create a basic ASBR configuration follow this procedure Step Action 1 Log into User EXEC mode 5530 24TFD gt enable 2 Log into Global Configuration mode 5530 24TFD config terminal The switch will respond with the following line Enter configuration commands one per line End with CNTL Z Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 54 IP Routing Configuration and Management 3 Log into the OSPF router configuration mode 5530 24TFD config router ospf Enable ASBR functionality 5530 24TFD config router as boundary router en Use the following commands to select the type of routes that OSPF will distribute to other OSPF devices RIP direct and static routes are supported 5530 24TFD config router redistribute rip en 5530 24TFD config router redistribute direct en 5530 24TFD config router redistribute static en Return to Global Configuration mode 5530 24TFD config router exit Once the commands in step 5 have be used to select the types of routes to redistribute apply the changes globally with the following commands 5530 24TFD config ip ospf apply redistribute
115. RP entries show arp command The show arp table command displays ARP entries The syntax for the show arp table command is show arp table lt A B C D gt Substitute lt A B C D gt above with the IP address of the ARP table to be displayed The show arp table command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode show ip arp command The show ip arp command displays the IP addresses of ARP entries The syntax for the show ip arp command is show ip arp lt s gt lt A B C D W X Z gt lt static gt The following table outlines the parameters for this command show ip arp parameters Parameter Description S Specify the subnet of the ARP entries to be displayed lt A B C D gt Specify the IP address of the ARP entry to be displayed This option is invalid if the switch is not in Layer 3 mode lt W X Y Z gt Enter subnet mask address in dotted decimal notation static Display the software ARP table all configured static entries including those without a valid route Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 65 The show ip arp command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode show ip arp static command The show ip arp static command displays all configured static entries in an ARP table including those wi
116. RRP backup router uses the same virtual MAC address The virtual MAC address on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series does not need to be configured The virtual MAC address is automatically set as Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 191 00 00 5E 00 01 lt VRID gt Where the VRID is an integer value in the range 1 to 255 that represents the virtual router identification The virtual MAC address is assigned when VRRP is configured on a switch port or VLAN The following example represents this process 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp address 199 10 1 20 1 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 199 enable Configuring normal VRRP operation The following configuration example illustrated below shows how to provide VRRP service for two edge host locations VRRP example topology Ail VLAN 2 IP 10 1 20 2 24 VRRP VIP 10 1 20 4 R2 VLAN 2 IP 10 1 20 3 24 VRRP VIP 10 1 20 1 virp priority 200 virp priority 100 Ri VLAN 3 R2 VLAN 3 IP 10 1 21 2 24 IP 10 1 21 3 24 VRRP VIP 10 1 21 1 VRRP VIP 10 1 21 4 vrrp priority 200 vrrp priority 100 Legend Ve Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 VARP master ats Any generic switch VARP b
117. Routing Configuration and Management Lsid The Link State ID is a link state type specific field containing either a Router ID or an IP address This field identifies the section of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement Routerld The unique identifier of the originating router in the Autonomous System Sequence This field is used to detect old or duplicate link state advertisements by assigning an incremental number to duplicate advertisements The higher the sequence number the more recent the advertisement The age of the link state advertisement in seconds Checksum The checksum of the complete content of the advertisement excluding the Age field This field is excluded so that the advertisement s age can be increased without updating the checksum The checksum used is the same as that used in ISO connectionless datagrams and is commonly referred to as the Fletcher checksum Advertisement The entire link state advertisement including the header 3 Click Refresh to update the information End Area Aggregate configuration The Area Aggregate tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure area aggregate information To configure OSPF area aggregates use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Area Aggregate tab This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series C
118. SE INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY The forgoing limitations of remedies also apply to any developer and or supplier of the Software Such developer and or supplier is an intended beneficiary of this Section Some jurisdictions do not allow these limitations or exclusions and in such event they may not apply 4 General a If Customer is the United States Government the following paragraph shall apply All Nortel Networks Software available under this License Agreement is commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation and in the event Software is licensed for or on behalf of the United States Government the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U S Federal Regulations at 48 C F R Sections 12 212 for non DoD entities and 48 C F R 227 7202 for DoD entities b Customer may terminate the license at any time Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license In either event upon termination Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction c Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from Customer s use of the Software Customer agrees to
119. The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The ip vrrp enable command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip vrrp enable command The no ip vrrp enable command is used to disable the virtual router The syntax of the no ip vrrp enable command is no ip vrrp lt vr_id gt enable The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The no ip vrrp enable command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp fast adv command The ip vrrp fast adv command is used to enable the VRRP fast advertisement functionality The syntax of the ip vrrp fast adv command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt fast adv enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 109 The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The ip vrrp fast adv command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip vrrp fast adv command The no ip vrrp fast adv command is used to disable the VRRP fast advertisement functionality The syntax of the no ip vrrp fast adv command is no ip vrrp lt vr_id gt fast adv enable The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The no ip vrrp fast adv command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp fast adv
120. To create the OSPF interface illustrated above for router R1 follow this procedure Step Action 1 Configure brouter port OSPF interface Configure port 2 as a brouter port with VLAN ID of 2134 and enable OSPF on this interface 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 vlan 2134 subnet 10 1 1 21 30 5530 24TFD config if router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 21 2 Configure the VLAN OSPF interface Create a port based VLAN VLAN 2 using spanning tree group 1 assign IP address 172 3 1 1 to VLAN 2 and enable OSPF on this interface 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 type port 5530 24TFD config spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 2 5530 24TFD config vlan member add 2 1 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 172 3 1 1 255 255 255 0 5530 24TFD config if router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 172 3 1 1 3 Assign a router ID to the new interface and enable OSPF globally 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router router id 1 1 1 1 5530 24TFD config router exit 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable End OSPF security The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series implementation of OSPF includes security mechanisms to prevent the OSPF routing domain from being attacked by unauthorized routers These security mechanisms prevent a malicious person from joining an OSPF domain and advertisi
121. a proxy report IGMP host membership report generates The default ReportProxyEnable setting is false disabled Robustness Specifies the robust value Use a Robustness value to tune the system for the expected packet loss on a subnet ote If a subnet experiences unacceptably high packet osses increase the Robustness value The default Robustness value is 2 Specifies the query time in seconds between IGMP host and query packets transmitted on an interface Querylnterval the time between general queries sent by the multicast router controls the number of IGMP messages allowed on the subnet The default setting is 125 seconds MRouterPorts Displays the set of ports in the VLAN providing connectivity to an IP multicast router Ver1 MRouterPorts Displays the set of ports in the VLAN providing connectivity to an IP Multicast router using IGMP version 1 Ver2MRouterPorts Displays the set of ports in the VLAN providing connectivity to an IP Multicast router using IGMP version 2 ActiveMRouterPorts Displays the set of active ports in the VLAN providing connectivity to an IP Multicast router Displays the IP address of a multicast querier router Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Enabling IGMP Snooping fora VLAN 307 Field Description QuerierPort Displays the port on which the
122. ace Configuration mode ip rip send command The ip rip send command is used to set the RIP version sent on this interface The syntax of the ip rip send command is ip rip send version lt rip version gt The lt rip version gt parameter indicates the RIP version The valid values for this parameter are notsend e ripi e rip1comp e rip2 The ip rip send command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip supply command The ip rip supply command is used to enable RIP route advertisement on this interface The syntax of the ip rip supply command is ip rip supply enable The ip rip supply command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip supply command The no ip rip supply command is used to disable RIP route advertisement on this interface The syntax of the no ip rip supply command is no ip rip supply enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 76 IP Routing Configuration and Management The no ip rip supply command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip timeout command The ip rip timeout command is used to set the RIP timeout value on this interface The syntax of the ip rip timeout command is ip rip timeout lt timer value gt The lt timer_ value gt parameter is an integer value between 15 and 259200 seconds The de
123. ackup In this example the switches have the following duties e R1 is the VRRP master for S2 e R2 is the VRRP master for S1 In this example VRRP is enabled with OSPF as the routing protocol on R1 and R2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 192 IP Routing Configuration and Management The VRRP priority setting is used to determine which router will become the VRRP master and which will become the VRRP backup In instances where the priority setting is the same for two routers the higher IP address becomes the tie breaker Therefore it is very important to set the correct VRRP priority VRRP fast advertisement will also be enabled in this example to allow for fast failover detection The following procedure outlines the steps necessary to reproduce the example described above Step Action 1 Configure VLAN 2 on router R1 a Create VLAN 2 on router R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 type port Configure the ports for VLAN 2 on R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 2 1 15 Configure an IP address for VLAN 2 Add IP address 10 1 20 2 255 255 255 0 to VLAN 2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 1 20 2 255 255 255 0 Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 2 5530
124. advertisement Metric Type The field specifies the metric type The value type1 is treated as an internal metric and type2 is treated as an external metric Subnets This field indicates whether subnetworks need to be advertised individually Options available are allow and suppress RoutePolicy The name of an existing route policy that will be used to determine whether a specific route should be advertised to a given protocol 3 Click Apply End Redistribution creation To create a new redistribution entry follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Redistribute tab This tab is illustrated above Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 255 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Redistribute dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert Redistribute dialog f 192 168 249 46 OSPF Insert Redistribube RouteSource C i static C rip ospf Enable enable disable Metric fo 0 16777215 MetricType C type1 type Subnets e allow supress RoutePolicy By Close Help 4 Using the fields provided create the new redistribution entry These fields are described in the following table Insert Redistrib
125. against the contents of the specified prefix list Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 268 IP Routing Configuration and Management MatchlpRouteSource If configured matches the next hop IP address for RIP routes and advertising router IDs for OSPF routes against the contents of the specified prefix list This option is ignored for all other route types MatchNextHop If configured matches the next hop IP address of the route against the contents of the specified prefix list This field applies only to non local routes MatchInterface If configured the switch matches the IP address of the interface by which the RIP route was learned against the contents of the specified prefix list This field is used only for RIP routes and ignored for all other type of route MatchRouteType Sets a specific route type to be matched applies only to OSPF routes Externaltype1 and Externaltype2 specify the OSPF routes of the specified type only OSPF internal refers to intra and inter area routes MatchMetric If configured the switch matches the metric of the incoming advertisement or existing route against the specified value 1 to 655535 If 0 then this field is ignored The default is 0 NssaPbit Set or reset the P bit in specified type 7 LSA By default the P bit is always set in case the user se
126. age digest appended to it which needs to be matched between sending and receiving routers The message digest is calculated on either side based on the MD5 Key and any padding then compared for a match If the message digest does not meet the match criteria the packet is rejected Each OSPF interface supports up to 2 keys identifiable by key ID to facilitate a smooth key transition during the rollover process Only the selected primary key is used to encrypt the OSPF transmit packets The process of key change is as follows Note Assume that all routers already use the same key for authentication and a new key is required 1 Add the second key to all routers The routers will continue to send OSPF packets encrypted with the old key 2 Activate the second key on all routers by setting it as the primary key Routers will send OSPF packets encrypted with the new key while still accepting packets using the old key This is necessary as some routers will not have activated the new key 3 Remove the old key when all routers activate the new key MD5 configuration example In the configuration example illustrated below MD5 is configured between router R1 and R2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 137 MD5 configuration example 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 R1 ew R2
127. alog opens Select the Area Aggregate tab The Area Aggregate window opens Select an ArealD to delete a fF WO N Click Delete End OSPF redistribution configuration The Redistribution tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF redistribution settings To configure OSPF redistribution use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Redistribute tab This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 254 IP Routing Configuration and Management OSPF dialog Redistribute tab xi Neighbors Link State Database Ext Link State Database General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces If Metrics Area Aggregate Redistribute Message Digest Stats Routesource Enable metre metreType subnets RoutePoky Apply Refresh Orow s Jaaa See 2 Use the fields provided on this tab to configure redistribution These fields are described in the following table Redistribute tab fields Field Description RouteSource Select the route source protocol for redistribution RIP Direct or Static Enable Indicates whether the redistribution entry is active Metric A value between 0 and 65535 that indicates the metric to be announced in the
128. arameter for the box that is it applies to all interfaces and cannot be set individually for each interface The default is 30 seconds RouteChanges The number of route changes made to the IP Route Database by RIP does not include the refresh of a route s age Queries The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems HoldDownTime Sets the length of time that RIP will continue to advertise a network after determining it is unreachable The range is 0 to 360 seconds The default is 120 seconds TimeOutInterval The time out interval between RIP update and all interfaces DeflmportMetric Sets the value of the default import metric to import a route into a RIP domain For announcing OSPF internal routes into a RIP domain if the policy does not specify a metric value the default import metric should be used For OSPF external routes the external cost is used 3 Click Apply Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 224 IP Routing Configuration and Management End RIP interface configuration RIP interface configuration is used to tailor RIP to the individual interfaces To configure a RIP interface perform the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt RIP from the Device Manager menu The RIP dialog is opened Select the Interface tab This tab is illu
129. ask gt lt mac offset gt secondary End Example Adding secondary IP interfaces to a VLAN Primary and secondary interfaces must reside on different subnets In the following example 4 1 0 10 is the primary IP and 4 1 1 10 is the secondary IP interface vlan 4 ip address 4 1 0 10 255 255 255 0 6 ip address 4 1 0 10 255 255 255 0 6 Removing primary IP interfaces from a VLAN when secondary interfaces are configured Step Action 1 Put the switch into interface mode for the VLAN interface vlan lt vlan gt Remove the secondary IP interface from the VLAN no ip address lt ip address secondary gt lt mask gt Remove the primary IP interface from the VLAN no ip address lt ip address primary gt lt mask gt lt mac offset gt End Example removing primary IP interface from a VLAN when secondary interfaces are configured In the following example 4 1 0 10 is the primary IP and 4 1 1 10 is the secondary IP interface vlan 4 no ip address 4 1 0 10 255 255 255 0 no ip address 4 1 1 10 255 255 255 0 Example removing secondary IP interface only from a VLAN interface vlan 4 no ip address 4 1 0 10 255 255 255 0 show vlan ip command The show vlan ip command shows routable VLAN configurations Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using
130. ated Router 10 1 1 25 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 20 1 1 1 Area ID 0 0 0 0 Admin State Disabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 172 1 1 1 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 172 1 1 1 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 203 203 100 52 Area ID 0 0 0 0 Admin State Disabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Backup Designated Router 0 0 0 0 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 show ip ospf neighbor Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm n e a a l 10 1 1 1 100 Full 0 Dyn LLL 10 1 1 26 1 Full 0 Dyn Neighbors 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 183 show ip route Ip Route DST MASK NEXT COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF 172 2 2 0 255 255 255 0 20 1 1 2 2 105 T 4 R IB 100 172 3 3 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 1 40 103 T 1 O IB 25 172 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 172 1 1 1 1 1001 C DB 0 20 1 1 0 255
131. ately refresh the information this tab displays The following table outlines the fields on this tab TCP tab fields Field Description RtoAlgorithm The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets RtoMin The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout measured in milliseconds RtoMax The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout measured in milliseconds MaxConn The limit on the total number of TCP connections that the entity can support In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic this object contains the value 1 End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 220 IP Routing Configuration and Management TCP Connections tab This tab displays information on the current TCP connections the switch maintains This tab is read only To view information on this tab follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the TCP Connections tab This tab is illustrated below TCP Connections tab 192167320920 E Cikas Aderans Ra tea rahe Routes ati akt nadana anr ingersan nan ant raceetinn nart ier TEF Cu imedis orientan eme ster a
132. ation IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 290 IP Routing Configuration and Management Insert Forwardings dialog 192 168 249 46 UDP_Forward Insert Forward x 37 Time Service DestPort r 137 NetBIOS NameSrv 138 NetBIOS DataSrv Close Help Using the provided fields configure the UDP forwarding These fields are outlined in the following table Insert Forwardings dialog fields Field Description O O DestPort The destination port of the UDP forwarding These are configured on the Protocols tab DestAddr The server IP address Click Insert End UDP forwarding deletion To delete a server IP address from a previously configured protocol use the following procedure Deleting a UDP forwarding Step Action 1 a A WO N From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears Select UDP Forwarding The UDP Forwarding dialog opens Select the Forwardings tab Select a DestPort to delete Click Delete End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 291 UDP forwarding list configuration The Forwarding Lists tab of the UDP Forward dialog is used to group the port server IP pairs configured on
133. below OSPF dialog Link State Database tab 192 168 249 46 OSPF x General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces If Metrics Neighbors L bute Message Digest Stats i Ext Link State Database areal Type Lad Routed sequence age checeum 0 rows 2 Using the fields provided view the link state database These fields are described in the following table Link State Database fields Field Description Areald The unique identifier of the Area the link state advertisement was received from Type The type of link state advertisement Each link state type has a separate advertisement format Lsid The Link State ID is a link state type specific field containing either a Router ID or an IP address This field identifies the section of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement Routerld The unique identifier of the originating router in the Autonomous System Sequence This field is used to detect old or duplicate link state advertisements by assigning an incremental number to duplicate advertisements The higher the sequence number the more recent the advertisement Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 249 The age of the link state advertisement in seconds Checksum The checksum
134. ble Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 171 vlan igmp 1000 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan mgmt 1 1 MLT Phase 1 mlt 5 name Trunk 5 enable member 5 6 learning normal mlt 5 learning normal mlt 5 bpdu all ports mlt 5 loadbalance basic STP Phase 2 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 1 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 100 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 1000 interface FastEthernet ALL spanning tree port 5 6 24 26 learning normal spanning tree port 5 6 24 26 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 timeout 120 no spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 enable exit interface FastEthernet ALL spanning tree port 10 learning disable exit MLT Phase 2 mlt spanning tree 5 stp 1 learning normal l e L3 no ip directed broadcast enable ip routing interface vlan 1 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 100 ip address 10 1 1 18 255 255 255 252 2 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 1000 ip address 172 3 3 1 255 255 255 252 3 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit ip arp timeout 360 ip dhcp relay i
135. ble The default router rip command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default default metric command The default default metric command is used to return the switch to the factory default RIP default import metric The syntax of the default default metric command is default default metric The default default metric command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default timers basic holddown command The default timers basic holddown command is used to return the switch to the factory default RIP holddown timer The syntax of the default timers basic holddown command is default timers basic holddown The default timers basic holddown command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default timers basic timeout command The default timers basic timeout command is used to return the switch to the factory default RIP timeout timer The syntax of the default timers basic timeout command is default timers basic timeout The default timers basic timeout command is executed in the Router Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 78 IP Routing Configuration and Management default timers basic update command The default timers basic update command is used to return the switch to the factory default RIP update timer The syntax of the default timers basic upda
136. bled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 174 IP Routing Configuration and Management show ip ospf area Area ID 0 0 0 0 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 35 Reachable Area Border Routers 2 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 15 Link State Advertisements Checksum 551120 0x868d0 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 37 Reachable Area Border Routers 2 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 1 Link State Advertisements 13 Link State Advertisements Checksum 454461 0x6ef3d show ip ospf interface Interface 10 1 1 1 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 100 Designated Router 10 1 1 1 Backup Designated Router 10 1 1 2 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 10 1 1 21 Area ID 0 0 0 0 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 100 Designated Router 10 1 1 21 Backup Designated Router 10 1 1 22 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 show ip ospf neighbor Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks
137. bled port Traffic from other addresses is Specifies the address source IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 303 Description Indicates the minimum number of seconds to wait between receiving a DHCP packet and actually forwarding the DHCP packet to the destination device A value of zero 0 indicates forwarding should be done immediately without any delay Indicates what type of DHCP packets this interface supports A value of none 1 results in all incoming DHCP and BOOTP packets being dropped AlwaysBroadcast Indicates if DHCP Reply packets should be broadcast to the DHCP client on this interface 4 Make changes as necessary in the fields provided 5 Click Apply End Note A procedure for viewing and graphing DHCP statistics can be found in Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch Configuration System Monitoring Part Number NN47200 505 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 304 IP Routing Configuration and Management Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 305 Configuring IGMP snooping using the Java Device Manager This section describes the methods and procedures to configure and manage IGMP snooping using the Java Device
138. calculated in each SPF pass The total number of Autonomous System Border Routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is calculated in each SPF pass The total number of link state advertisements in this area s link state database excluding Autonomous System external link state advertisements The sum of the link state advertisements checksums contained in this area s link state database This sum excludes external link state type 5 link state advertisements The sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers Controls the import of summary link state advertisements into stub areas It has no effect on other areas If the value is noAreaSummary the router will neither originate nor propagate summary link state advertisements into the stub area If the value is sendAreaSummary the router will both summarize and propagate summary link state advertisements End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 233 OSPF area creation The Areas tab can also be used to create a new OSPF area To create a new OSPF area follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The
139. ce Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Areas tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF katti Areas tab xi Ext Link State Databese AreaAggregate Redistrbute Message Digest Vir ual If Message Diges Stats Gereral Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces IF Metrics Neichbors Vrtual Neighbors Hosts Link Stete Database ImportAs xterr semen natica 0 0 9 0 importExternal O sendareasummary e aS ea a Bl coe 1 10Ww s 2 Using the fields provided configure the existing OSPF areas These fields are described in the table below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 232 IP Routing Configuration and Management Areas tab fields Field Areald ImportAsExtern SpfRuns AreaBdrRtrCount AsBdrRtrCount AreaLsaCount AreaLsaCksumSum AreaSummary 3 Click Apply Description The area s unique identifier Area ID 0 0 0 0 is used for the OSPF backbone The area s support for importing Autonomous System external link state advertisements The options available are importExternal importNoExternal and importNssa The number of times that the intra area route table has been calculated using this area link state database The total number of Area Border Routers reachable within this area This is initially zero and is
140. ch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 122 IP Routing Configuration and Management Adding a static ARP entry to a brouter port To add a static ARP entry to a brouter port use the ip arp command This command has the following syntax ip arp ip lt ip_ address gt mac lt mac_address gt port lt port number gt vid lt vid_number gt The following table outlines the parameters of this command ip arp parameters ip_address The IP address of the entry mac_address The MAC address of the entry port_number The slot port number of the brouter port vid_number The VLAN ID of the entry The following is an example of adding a static ARP entry to a brouter port 5530 24TFD config ip arp 172 2 2 13 00 00 98 22 33 44 1 46 vid 1 Deleting a static ARP entry To delete a static ARP entry use the no ip arp command This command has the following syntax no ip arp ip lt ip address gt The lt ip_ address gt parameter represents the IP address of the entry to delete The following is an example of deleting a static ARP entry 5530 24TFD config no ip arp 172 2 2 13 Note Deleting a static ARP entry is applicable to both VLANs and brouter ports Routing Information Protocol RIP configuration This section provides examples of the common RIP configuration tasks and includes the CLI commands used to create the confi
141. ch lists the optimal route to every destination in the system Each router advertises its routing information by sending a routing information update at regular intervals Neighboring routers use this information to recalculate their routing tables and retransmit the routing information For RIP version 1 no mask information is exchanged the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update For RIP version 2 mask information is always included The sequence of processes governed by the routing algorithm is as follows 1 When a router starts it initializes the RIP data structures and then waits for indications from lower level protocols that its interfaces are functional 2 RIP advertisements are send on all the interfaces that are configured to send routing information Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 24 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols 3 The neighbors will send their routing tables and the new router will update its routing table based on the advertisements received 4 From now on periodic updates are send by each router in the network to ensure a correct routing database If a router does not receive an update from another router within a timeout period it deletes the routes served by the nonupdating router from its routing table However it keeps these routes temp
142. cies on the switch To configure OSPF accept policies perform the following tasks Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 274 IP Routing Configuration and Management Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected Select the OSPF Accept tab This tab is illustrated below Policy dialog OSPF Accept tab x Prefix List Route Policy Applying Policy RIP In Out Policy AdvertsngRt Enable MetricType Poicyname 29 Refresh insert 2 0 E IB 4 E E cose He 0 rows 2 Using the fields provided configure the desired accept policy These fields are described in the following table OSPF Accept tab fields Field Description AdvertisingRtr The advertising router associated with the accept policy Enable Indicates whether the policy is enabled Metric Type Indicates the metric type associated with the policy Available options are type1 type2 and any PolicyName Indicates the name associated with the policy 3 Click Apply End OSPF Accept Policy creation To create a new OSPF accept policy follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected Sel
143. cifies the wait time per probe The value for this parameter is in the range from 1 255 The default value is 5 seconds Example traceroute 10 3 2 134 w 15 lt 1 1464 gt Specifies the UDP probe packet size TIP probe packet size is 40 plus specified data length in bytes Example traceroute 10 3 2 134 w 60 ip route weight command The ip route weight command changes the weight or cost of a static route The syntax for the ip route weight command is ip route lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt lt O P Q R gt weight lt 1 65535 gt The following table outlines the parameters for this command ip route weight parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Enter IP address of the destination point of the route being modified lt W X Y Z gt Enter subnet mask address of the destination node for the route being modified Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 64 IP Routing Configuration and Management nT eee ee Parameter Description lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route being modified lt 1 65535 gt Enter the new weight or cost of the static route The ip route weight command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Address Resolution Protocol ARP commands Use the CLI to display create configure and remove A
144. combination the following functional characteristics can be expected e Ifthe stack base unit becomes non operational the following will occur Layer 3 functionality will continue to run on the non base unit Dynamic routing protocols still run on the non base unit e If the stack non base unit becomes non operational the following will occur Layer 3 functionality will continue to run on the base unit Dynamic routing protocols run on the base unit A disadvantage of this configuration is that if the non operational unit does not rejoin the stack address duplication will occur In stack environments of more than 2 units Nortel recommends using IP blocking mode full In such a stack environment and IP blocking mode combination the following functional characteristics can be expected e Ifthe stack base unit becomes non operational the following will occur The temporary base unit takes over base unit duties The temporary base unit runs the Layer 3 and DRP functionality The takeover of the temporary base unit will cause the MAC addresses of the Layer 3 interfaces to change and the MAC addresses from the temporary base unit MAC address pool are used This may cause a minor disruption in routing traffic To facilitate quick failover in this instance gratuitous ARP messages are sent out for each interface for 5 minutes at 15 second intervals e Ifa stack non base unit becomes non operational the followin
145. command The no ip arp command removes an ARP entry The syntax for the no ip arp command is no ip arp lt A B C D gt Substitute lt A B C D gt above with the IP address of the static ARP entry to remove The no ip arp command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode ip arp timeout command The ip arp timeout command configures an aging time for the ARP entries The syntax for the ip arp timeout command is ip arp timeout lt 5 360 gt Substitute lt 5 360 gt above with the amount of time in minutes before an ARP entry ages out The default value is 360 minutes The ip arp timeout command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Proxy ARP commands This section outlines the commands used to configure and manage Proxy ARP on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series ip arp proxy command The ip arp proxy command is used to enable proxy ARP functionality on the switch The syntax of the ip arp proxy command is ip arp proxy enable The ip arp proxy command is executed in the Layer 3 IP VLAN Interface Configuration mode no ip arp proxy command The no ip arp proxy command is used to disable proxy ARP functionality on the switch The syntax of the no ip arp proxy command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 67
146. command is ip rip in policy lt policy name gt The lt policy name gt parameter represents the name of a previously configured switch policy The ip rip in policy command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip in policy command The no ip rip in policy command is used to remove a in policy for the RIP interface The syntax of the no ip rip in policy command is no ip rip in policy lt policy name gt The lt policy name gt parameter represents the name of a previously configured switch policy The no ip rip in policy command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip listen command The ip rip listen command is used to allow this interface to listen for RIP advertisements The syntax of the ip rip listen command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 73 I LLL ip rip listen enable The ip rip listen command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip listen command The no ip rip listen command is used to prevent this interface from listening for RIP advertisements The syntax of the no ip rip listen command is ip rip listen enable The no ip rip listen command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip out policy command The ip rip out policy command is used to add an out pol
147. ction describes how to create a basic VRRP configuration on a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series VRRP uses an election process to select a master router that hosts use as the default gateway If the master router the default gateway fails the VRRP backup router automatically replaces the master router and becomes the new default gateway In either case the default gateway IP address and MAC address does not change thereby providing transparent operation The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can be configured in a master master configuration for load balancing applications that use Split MultiLink Trunking SMLT This configuration allows both switches to respond to ARPs and forward traffic VRRP Priority settings can be configured to select the VRRP master router for a specified VLAN The VRRP Priority setting is an integer value in the range 1 and 255 where the highest value is used to elect the VRRP master router If two or more switches have the same priority value the switch with the highest numerical IP address value is selected and becomes the VRRP master The host is unaware of the entire process When a host sends traffic to a different subnet it sends an ARP request for the MAC address of the default gateway In this case the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series VRRP master router replies with its virtual MAC address The benefit of using a virtual MAC address is that if the master router fails the V
148. d on both the client as well as server Note The DHCP Relay feature shares resources with QoS If the DHCP Relay feature is enabled a QoS policy with a precedence of 11 cannot be installed For further information on QoS policies refer to Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration Quality of Service Part Number NN47200 504 Global DHCP relay configuration This configuration enables or disables DHCP relay for the entire unit or stack Once DHCP relay is disabled the switch stack will not relay DHCP BOOTP Global DHCP relay commands page 42 across L3 VLANs However the settings will still be configurable describes the global DHCP relay commands Global DHCP relay commands show ip dhcp relay shows global DHCP relay state no ip dhcp relay disables DHCP relay globally ip dhcp relay enables DHCP relay globally Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 43 These commands must be executed in the Global Configuration command mode Interface DHCP relay configurations These configurations are associated with the L3 VLAN that the client or server resides on IP routing must be enabled and a valid IP address must be assigned to the L3 VLAN before it generates the default settings for DHCP relay Interface DHCP relay commands page 43 describes the interface DHCP relay c
149. d is executed in the Global Configuration mode ip ospf apply redistribute rip command The ip ospf apply redistribute rip command is used to apply only RIP OSPF redistribution configuration on the switch The syntax of the ip ospf apply redistribute rip command is ip ospf apply redistribute rip The ip ospf apply redistribute rip command is executed in the Global Configuration mode ip ospf apply redistribute static command The ip ospf apply redistribute static command is used to apply only static OSPF redistribution configuration on the switch The syntax of the ip ospf apply redistribute static command is ip ospf apply redistribute static The ip ospf apply redistribute static command is executed in the Global Configuration mode ip ospf spf run command The ip ospf spf run command is used to immediately initiate an SPF run upon holddown timer expiration to update the link state database The syntax of the ip ospf spf run command is ip ospf spf run The ip ospf spf run command is executed in the Global Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 84 IP Routing Configuration and Management router ospf enable command The router ospf enable command is used to enable OSPF globally on the switch The syntax of the router ospf enable command is router ospf enable The rout
150. d line interface Automatic router ID change If a unit leaves the stack and becomes standalone when the stack disjoins the router ID is automatically changed to its default value This prevents router ID duplication in the OSPF routing domain Prerequisites IP blocking must be turned off set to none and OSPF must be globally enabled TIP The change in router ID is temporary not saved in non volatile random access memory and upon reset the router ID is restored Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 45 IP blocking IP Blocking is a Layer 3 feature of the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series that provides built in safeguards for the usage of duplicate IP addresses in a stacked environment IP Blocking is used whenever a unit leaves a stack or is rebooting inside the context of a stack Depending on the setting in use Layer 3 functionality is either continued or blocked by this feature IP Blocking can exist in either a none or full condition When IP Blocking is set to none duplicate IP addresses are permitted in the stack unconditionally When the full condition is set duplicate IP addresses are blocked in the stack unconditionally In a stack environment Nortel recommends that IP blocking mode none be used in a stack of 2 units In such a stack environment and IP blocking mode
151. d protocols will rerun when an ECMP path fails and the other configured paths will automatically take the load Load sharing implies better use of network facilities ECMP is selected based on the source and destination IP address in the packet The hash_control register has a HASH_SELECT field which is set to 5 lower CRC 32 R1 CRC32 SIP DIP R2 R1 amp Ox1F The Least Significant 5 bits are selected ecmp_index R2 ecmp_count 1 Note The value ecmp_count above is zero based in the hardware so if four paths are present then the value is three This is why the value is ecmp_count 1 The ECMP traffic distribution algorithm is demonstrated in the following example Consider two network devices Device 1 at the IP address 192 1 1 3 and Device 2 at 192 1 1 4 Device 1 send to Device 2 so that 192 1 1 3 is the source IP address SIP and 192 1 1 4 is the destination IP address Device 2 To calculate the CRC32 for the example source and destination IP address noted above the following calculations would be made e CRC32 polynomial x 32 x 28 x 23 x 22 x 16 x 12 x 11 x 10 x 8 X 7 X 5 Xx 4 x 2 x 1 1 e R1 CRC32 0xc0010103 0xc0010104 0xf474b549 e R2 0xf474b549 amp Oxif 9 If for the purposes of this example it is assumed that the ECMP count is 4 hardware entries 0 though 3 the following calculation is then made e ecmp_index 9 44 1 1 This means that in this example the second
152. default gateway router for an end station is lost This section describes the CLI commands used to configure VRRP router vrrp enable command The router vrrp enable command is used to globally enable VRRP on a switch The syntax of the router vrrp enable command is router vrrp enable The router vrrp enable command is executed in the Global Configuration mode no router vrrp enable command The no router vrrp enable command is used to globally disable VRRP on a switch The syntax of the no router vrrp enable command is no router vrrp enable The no router vrrp enable command is executed in the Global Configuration mode router vrrp command The router vrrp command is used to place the switch into Router Configuration mode for the purposes of VRRP configuration The syntax of the router vrrp command is router vrrp The router vrrp command is executed in the Global Configuration mode ping virtual address enable command The ping virtual address enable command is used to enable ICMP echo replies from VRRP associated addresses The syntax of the ping virtual address enable command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 105 ping virtual address enable The ping virtual address enable command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no p
153. e 5 Click Delete Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 276 IP Routing Configuration and Management End RIP In and Out Policy configuration The RIP In Out Policy tab is used to configure RIP accept and announce policies on switch interfaces To configure these policies follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected Select the RIP In Out Policy tab This tab is illustrated below Policy dialog RIP In Out Policy tab xi Prefix List Route Policy Applying Policy OSPF Accept RIP In Out Policy 0 0 0 0 VLAN 2 7 192 168 249 46 VLAN 1 2 row s 2 Using the fields provided configure the RIP policies These fields are described in the following table RIP In Out Policy tab fields Field Description Address The address of the RIP interface Interface The associated switch interface InPolicy A previously configured policy that will be used as the accept policy on this interface OutPolicy A previously configured policy that will be used as the announce policy on this interface 3 Click Apply End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 A
154. e Customer will promptly return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction Nortel Networks may audit by remote polling or other reasonable means to determine Customer s Software activation or usage levels If suppliers of third party software included in Software require Nortel Networks to include additional or different terms Customer agrees to abide by such terms provided by Nortel Networks with respect to such third party software 2 Warranty Except as may be otherwise expressly agreed to in writing between Nortel Networks and Customer Software is provided AS IS without any warranties conditions of any kind NORTEL NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES CONDITIONS FOR THE SOFTWARE EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WARRANTY OF NON INFRINGEMENT Nortel Networks is not obligated to provide support of any kind for the Software Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusion of implied warranties and in such event the above exclusions may not apply 3 Limitation of Remedies INNO EVENT SHALL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS AGENTS OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING a DAMAGES BASED ON ANY THIRD PARTY CLAIM b LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO CUSTOMER S RECORDS FILES OR DATA OR c DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWI
155. e The TTL for outgoing packets and the broadcast mask for incoming packets are also added on this tab To configure the broadcast interface use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager menu The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab selected Select the Broadcast Interfaces tab This tab is illustrated below UDP Forward dialog Broadcast Interfaces tab x Protocols Forwardings Forwarding Lists Broadcast Interfaces LocallFAddr UdpPortFwdListId NumRxPkts NumFwdPkts NumDropPktsDestUnreach 0 0 0 192 168 249 46 1 4 gt jaAa inserted 2 Using the provided fields configure the broadcast interface These fields are outlined in the following table Broadcast Interface tab fields Field Description LocallfAddr The IP address of the local interface UdpPortFwdListld The port forwarding lists associated with the interface This ID is defined in the Forwarding Lists tab MaxTtl Indicates the maximum number of hops an IP broadcast packet can take from the source device to the destination device This is an integer value between 1 and 16 NumRxPkts The total number of UDP broadcast packets received by this local interface NumFwdPkts The total number of UDP broadcast packets forwarded Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 Aug
156. e FastEthernet 2 1 5530 24TFD config if brouter vlan 2091 subnet 10 1 1 14 30 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy rip pol 2 5530 24TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 8 5530 24TFD config if brouter vlan 2090 subnet 10 1 1 6 30 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy rip pol 2 End Open Shortest Path First OSPF configuration This section contains examples of common OSPF related configuration tasks The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the following OSPF standards e RFC 2328 OSPF version 2 e RFC 1850 OSPF Management Information Base e RFC 2178 OSPF MD5 cryptographic authentication This section provides examples of the common OSPF configuration tasks and includes the CLI commands used to create the configuration configuring an IP OSPF interface An OSPF interface can be configured on a brouter port or on a VLAN The following section demonstrates the creation of the example OSPF interface illustrated below OSPF interface example topology I A ie D 1723 Area 0 S104 ee R1 ati 7 10 1 1 20 30 OSPF network 1 172 3 1 1 2 10 1 1 214 Legend brouter port E Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 135
157. e configured as a ASBR with redistribution enabled Route policies consist of the following items Prefix Lists List of IP addresses with subnet masks ldentified by a prefix list name and unique identifier Prefix lists support the comparison of ranges of incoming masks Route Maps Contain a set of match and set parameters Match and set parameters can contain several prefix lists A set of match and set parameters are identified by a sequence number Accept and deny actions are associated with each sequenced parameter set Sequence numbers act as a preference setting Sets with a lower sequence number are preferred over those with a higher sequence number Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 37 To configure routing policies create the appropriate prefix lists and then assign those prefix lists to route maps Once all route maps have been created assign them to the appropriate type of policy In a stacked environment the following rules are applied to routing policies e The policy database is stored in all stack units e Policy configuration is supported from only the base unit The base unit sends updates to non base units to update the policy database in each stack unit e During database updates only the database in the base unit is sync
158. e information Virtual Interface fields Field Description Areald Specifies the unique ID of the area connected to the interface TIP an area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the OSPF backbone Neighbor Specifies ID of adjacent reachable routers TransitDelay Specifies the estimated number of seconds required to transmit a link state update packet over the virtual interface The transit delay is expressed as an integer between 0 and 3600 Retransinterval Specifies the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to the virtual interface The retransmit interval is also used to transmit database description and link state request packets The retransmit interval is expressed as an integer between 0 and 3600 Hellolnterval Specifies the interval in seconds between the Hello packets sent by the router on the virtual interface TIP This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network The hello interval is expressed as an integer between 1 and 65535 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 241 Field Description RtrDeadInterval Specifies the number of seconds since a router last transmitted hello packets before neighbor routers declare it down The retransmit dead interval i
159. e ip route enable command is ip route lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt lt O P Q R gt enable The following table describes the parameters for this command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 62 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip route enable parameters Parameter lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt Description Enter IP address of the destination point of the route being enabled Enter subnet mask address of the destination node for the route being enabled lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route being enabled The ip route enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode ip route disable command The ip route disable command disables a static route The syntax for the ip route disable command is ip route lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt lt O P Q R gt disable The following table describes the parameters for this command ip route disable parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt Enter IP address of the destination point of the route being disabled Enter subnet mask address of the destination node for the route being disabled lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route being disabled The ip route disable command is executed in the
160. e map rip pol 1 permit 1 match network Prefix 1 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 1 permit 1 set injectlist Prefix 1 3 Add the route policy created in step 2 to both RIP core ports 5530 24TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 7 5530 24TFD config if brouter vlan 2090 subnet 10 1 1 1 30 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip in policy rip pol 1 LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 132 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5530 24TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 8 5530 24TFD config if brouter vlan 2091 subnet 10 1 1 5 30 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip in policy rip pol 1 End The show running config command is used to display the current configuration of a switch Using this command on the above configuration would yield the following results rip pol 1 Route Policies ip prefix list Prefix 1 10 1 240 0 20 ge 20 le 32 route map rip pol 1 route map rip pol 1 1 enable no route map rip pol 1 1 match interface route map rip pol 1 1 match metric 0 route map rip pol 1 1 match network Prefix 1 no route map rip pol 1 1 match next hop route map rip pol 1 1 match route type any no route map rip pol 1 match route source route map rip pol 1 1 set injectlist Prefix 1 route map rip pol 1 set mask 0 0 0 0 ro
161. e with the exception that the next hop of the route is not directly connected to the network entity Non local static routes are useful in situations where there are multiple paths to a network and the number of static routes could be reduced by using only one route with a remote gateway Because of their static nature this type of solution is not scalable Thus in a large or growing network this type of route management may not be desirable Also non local static routes do not have the capacity to determine the failure of paths Thus a router can still attempt to use a path after it has failed Routing Information Protocol RIP Routing Information Protocol RIP is a standard dynamic routing protocol based on the Bellman Ford or distance vector algorithm It is used as an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP RIP allows routers to exchange information to compute routes through an IPv4 based network The hop count or distance is used as a metric to determine the best path to a remote network or host The hop count cannot exceed 15 hops assuming a cost of one hop for each network RIP is defined in RFC 1058 for RIP version 1 and RFC 2453 for RIP version 2 The most significant difference between the two versions is that RIP version 2 supports subnet masks and next hop information in the RIP packet RIP operation RIP uses User Datagram Protocol UDP data packets to exchange routing information Each router maintains a routing table whi
162. ect the OSPF Accept tab This tab is illustrated above 2 Click Insert Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 275 3 The Insert OSPF Accept dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert OSPF Accept dialog f 192 168 249 46 Policy Insert OSPF Accep AdvertisingRtr Enable enable disable MetricType typel type2 any PolicyName Ey Close Help 4 Using the fields provided create the new accept policy These fields are described in the following table Insert OSPF Accept fields Field Description AdvertisingRtr The advertising router associated with the accept policy Enable Indicates whether the policy is enabled MetricType Indicates the metric type associated with the policy Available options are type 1 type 2 and any PolicyName Indicates the name associated with the policy 5 Click Insert End OSPF Accept Policy deletion To delete an OSPF accept policy use the following procedure Deleting an OSPF accept policy Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears Select Policy The Policy dialog appears 2 3 Select the OSPF Accept tab The OSPF Accept window opens 4 Select an AdvertisingRtr to delet
163. ed in the following table Insert ARP Entry fields Field Description MacAddress The unique hardware address of the device IpAddress The IP address of the device used to represent a point of attachment in a TCP IP internetwork Click Insert The ARP tab is displayed with the new entry End ARP Interfaces tab The ARP Interfaces tab is used to configure proxy ARP on the switch Proxy ARP allows the switch to respond to an ARP request from a locally attached host or end station for a remote destination To configure proxy ARP use the following procedure Step Action 1 2 Select IP Routing gt IP from the Device Manager menu The IP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected Select the ARP Interfaces tab This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 217 IP screen ARP Interfaces tab 192 167 1209 1p x Goals Addresses Rcutes Stazi 2ou es ARP ARP Intertaces ARP inspectior VLAN ARF mspezzon pzrt CP TCP Conrectiors 0 gt _steners EVE WAN FLSE 1b 120i deabk cmabe VLAN S LLLE diabk Stabe iyl Refresh S a Ga E dems tof 2 ovis Using the provided fields configure proxy ARP These fields are outlined in the following table
164. edure Step Action 1 Select a port on the Device Manager Front Panel view 2 Select Edit gt Port from the Device Manager menu The Port dialog opens with the Interface tab selected Select the IP Address tab LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 288 IP Routing Configuration and Management 3 Select a brouter port from these listed on the tab by clicking in the row 4 Click Delete End UDP broadcast forwarding UDP broadcast forwarding is a general mechanism for selectively forwarding limited UDP broadcasts received on an IP interface to a configured IP address This section outlines the procedures used to configure and manage UDP broadcast forwarding using the Java Device Manager UDP protocol configuration The Protocols tab of the UDP Forward dialog is used to define UDP ports for use in UDP forwarding To configure a UDP port use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager menu The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab selected This tab is illustrated below UDP Forward dialog Protocols tab xi Painia Name 37 Time Service 49 TACACS Service 53 DNS 69 TFTP 137 NetBIOS NameSrv 138 NetBIOS DataSrv 6 row s 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Protocols dialog opens This d
165. een 1 and 65535 The default cost fast ethernet command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default cost gig ethernet command The default cost gig ethernet command is used to define the default cost metric of a gig ethernet 1000 Mbps port The syntax of the default cost gig ethernet command is default cost gig ethernet lt metric value gt The lt metric value gt parameter represents the cost value to assign to the port This value is an integer between 1 and 65535 The default cost gig ethernet command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default cost ten gig ethernet command The default cost ten gig ethernet command is used to define the default cost metric of a ten gig ethernet 10000 Mbps port The syntax of the default cost ten gig ethernet command is default cost ten gig ethernet lt metric value gt The lt metric value gt parameter represents the cost value to assign to the port This value is an integer between 1 and 65535 The default cost ten gig ethernet command is executed in the Router Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 89 host route command Use the host route command to add a host to a router For more information about host routes see OSPF host route page 29 The syntax for the host
166. eived by the virtual router with IP TTL Time To Live not equal to 255 PriorityZeroPktsRcvd The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with a priority of 0 PriorityZeroPktsSent The total number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with a priority of 0 InvalidTypePktsRcevd The number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with an invalid value in the type field AddressListErrors The total number of packets received for which the address list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router AuthFailures The total number of VRRP packets received that do not pass the authentication check InvalidAuthType The total number of packets received with an unknown authentication type AuthTypeMismatch The total number of packets received with Auth Type not equal to the locally configured authentication method PacketLengthErrors The total number of packets received with a packet length less than the length of the VRRP header End Viewing general VRRP statistics General VRRP statistics can be viewed and graphed on the Stats tab Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 284 IP Routing Configuration and Management To view and graph general VRRP statistics use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt VRRP from
167. el Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series The syntax forthe no ip dhcp relay fwd path command is no ip dhcp relay fwd path lt A B C D gt lt O P Q R gt The following table outlines the parameters for this command no ip dhcp relay fwd path parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the forwarding path to be removed lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the forwarding path to be removed The no ip dhcp relay fwd path command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode show vlan dhcp relay command The show vlan dhcp relay command displays the current DHCP relay forward path configuration for each VLAN on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series The syntax for the show vlan dhcp relay command is show vlan dhcp relay lt 1 4094 gt Substitute lt 1 4094 gt above with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to be displayed Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 119 The show vlan dhcp relay command is executed in the User EXEC command mode ip dhcp relay command The ip dhcp relay command allows configures DHCP relay settings on a VLAN The syntax for the ip dhep relay command is ip dhcp relay min sec lt 0 65535 gt mode bootp dhcp bootp dhcp The following
168. embers 13 14 1001 VLAN 1001 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 10 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 179 show vlan ip Id ifIndex Address Mask MacAddress Offset Routing 1 10001 203 203 100 52 255 255 255 0 00 15 9B F1 FC 40 1 Enabled 103 10103 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F1 FC 42 3 Enabled 104 10104 10 1 1 25 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F1 FC 43 4 Enabled 105 10105 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 00 15 9B F1 FC 44 5 Enabled 1001 11001 172 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 00 15 9B F1 FC 41 2 Enabled show ip rip Default Import Metric 8 Domain HoldDown Time 120 Queries 0 Rip Enabled Route Changes 1 Timeout Interval 180 Update Time 30 show ip rip interface IP Address Enable Send Receive Advertise When Down 10 1 1 2 false riplCompatible riplOrRip2 false 10 1 1 25 false riplCompatible riplOrRip2 false 20 1 1 1 true riplCompatible riplOrRip2 false 172 1 1 1 false riplCompatible riplOrRip2 false 203 203 100 52 false riplCompatible riplOrRip2 false RIP Dfl1t Dflt Trigger AutoAgg IP Address Cost Supply Listen Update Enable Supply Listen Poison Proxy 10 1 1 2 1 false false false false true true false false 10 1 1 25 1 false false false false true true false false 20 1 1 1 1 false false false false true true false false 172 1 1 1 1 false false false false true true fa
169. en x IP Address ess O e 1 rows The following table describes the IP Address tab fields IP Address tab fields Field Description ibAddress The IP address associated with the selected p VLAN NetMask The subnet mask address BcastAddrFormat The IP broadcast address format used on this interface The size of the largest IP datagram which this entity can reassemble from fragmented incoming IP datagrams received on this interface Vlanld The VLAN number A value of 1 indicates that the VLAN ID is ignored MacOffset Used to translate the IP address into a MAC address The valid range is 1 256 ReasmMaxSize Secondarylf Indicates whether or not this entry corresponds to a secondary interface If the value is false then this is the primary IP address if the value is true then this is a secondary IP address ote You can assign 1 primary IP address and p to 8 secondary IP addresses to a VLAN 4 Click Insert The Insert IP Address screen opens This screen is illustrated below Insert IP Address screen f 192 168 249 46 IP LAN 2 Insert IP Address IpAddress NetMask sis MacOffset 1 256 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 209 5 Type the IP Address Subnet Mask and Mac Address Offs
170. ending their configuration The following table describes the router types in an OSPF network OSPF router types Router Type Description Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR Area Border Router ABR Internal Router IR Designated Router DR Backup Designated Router BDR OSPF host route A router attached at the edge of an OSPF network is called an AS boundary router ASBR An ASBR generally has one or more interfaces that run an inter domain routing protocol In addition any router distributing static routes or RIP routes into OSPF is considered an ASBR The ASBR forwards external routes into the OSPF domain In this way routers inside the OSPF network learn about destinations outside their domain A router attached to two or more areas inside an OSPF network is considered an area border router ABR ABRs play an important role in OSPF networks by condensing the amount of OSPF information that is disseminated A router that has interfaces only within a single area inside an OSPF network is considered an internal router IR Unlike ABRs IRs have topological information only about the area in which they are contained In a broadcast network a single router is elected to be the designated router DR for that network A DR assumes the responsibility of making sure all routers on the network are synchronized with one another and also advertises that network to the rest of the AS A backup de
171. entry displays on the DHCP Relay screen End To delete a DHCP entry use the following procedure Deleting a DHCP entry Step Action 1 From the Device Manager select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP Relay tab appears 2 Select a DHCP relay entry to delete 3 Click Delete End DHCP Snooping To enable DHCP Snooping use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP window appears 2 Select the DHCP Snooping tab DHCP Snooping dialog appears DHCP Snooping tab e x DHT Reay DHCP Sopng DHET Enozpi g VLAN DECP S oozing port CHEP Bi di gs IP Scurco Guard pzrt IP Sourze Guard cdd zsses 1 DhepSnoogincEn bled wiw Refresh chow Hen o 3 To enable DHCP Snooping click the check box The status appears 4 Click Apply End DHCP Snooping VLAN To view DHCP Snooping information for VLANs use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 298 IP Routing Configuration and Management Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP window appears 2 Select the DHCP Snooping VLAN tab The DHCP Snooping VLAN window appears If DHCP Snooping is enabled for a VLAN the field is true If DHCP Snooping is disabled for a VLAN the field is false D
172. er router fails an election process provides a dynamic transition of forwarding responsibility to a new master router e Priority an 8 bit value assigned to all VRRP routers A higher value represents a higher priority for election to the master router The priority can be a value from 1 to 255 When a master router fails an election process takes place among the backup routers to dynamically reassign the role of the master router Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 38 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP The Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP feature allows routers to determine equal cost paths to the same destination prefix The multiple paths can be used for load sharing of traffic and allows faster convergence to other active paths in case of network failure By maximizing load sharing among equal cost paths links between routers can be used more efficiently when sending IP traffic The ECMP feature supports and complements the following protocols types e Open Shortest Path First OSPF e Routing Information Protocol RIP e Static Routes ECMP is only supported on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5520 and 5530 ECMP will work in a mixed stack but will not run on any Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5510 units in the stack UDP broadcast forwarding Some network applica
173. er a value to filter on the hop count or metric of the route Interface Select this check box and enter a value to filter on the route s associated interface Proto Select this check box and enter a value to filter on the route protocol Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 214 IP Routing Configuration and Management PathType Select this check box and enter a value to filter on the route path type Pref Select this check box and enter a value to filter on the route preference value 3 Click Filter End The tab will now be filtered on the criteria specified Static Routes tab The Static Routes tab is used to configure static routes for the switch To configure a static route with this tab follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the Static Routes tab This tab is illustrated below Static Routes tab 992 167 1209 IP xj Chbas aderans Raiza Sli Rutes an at interfaces ARE Inspection w an ai ngamen pare na er renerans tee teners Haw test Mese _ noor metre Itzrds4 Erbe Sans 2 0 0 0 0 3 C 192 167 120 LO MLAB 10 92 167 120 2 true active Pop azfrzsa Fae be 5 al Al tx db 2 Click Insert The Insert Static Route screen opens This screen is
174. er ospf enable command is executed in the Global Configuration mode no router ospf enable command The no router ospf enable command is used to disable OSPF globally on the switch The syntax of the no router ospf enable command is no router ospf enable The no router ospf enable command is executed in the Global Configuration mode router ospf command The router ospf command is used to place the switch into Router Configuration mode for the purposes of OSPF configuration The syntax of the router ospf command is router ospf The router ospf command is executed in the Global Configuration mode default router ospf command The default router ospf command is used to return the switch to the default OSPF setting which is disabled The syntax of the default router ospf command is default router ospf enable The default router ospf command is executed in the Global Configuration mode accept adv rtr command The accept adv rtr command is used to configure the router to accept advertisements from another router in the system The syntax of the accept adv rtr command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 85 accept adv rtr lt router ip address gt enable metric type any typel type2 route policy policy name The following table outlin
175. er rip enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 68 IP Routing Configuration and Management router rip command The router rip command is used to enter the Router Configuration mode for RIP Router Configuration mode is used to configure various aspects of RIP OSPF router ospf command and VRRP router vrrp command The syntax of the router rip command is router rip The router rip command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode network command The network command is used to enable RIP on an IP interface The syntax of the network command is network lt ip address gt The lt ip_address gt parameter represents the IP address of the interface to be configured The network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no network command The no network command is used to disable RIP on an IP interface The syntax of the no network command is no network lt ip address gt The lt ip address gt parameter represents the IP address of the interface to be disabled The no network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode timers basic holddown command The timers basic holddown command is used to set the RIP holddown timer The syntax of the timers basic holddown command is timers
176. es the parameters for this command accept adv rtr parameters Parameter Description router_ip address This parameter represents the IP address of the router advertisements will be accepted from The value 0 0 0 0 denotes that advertisements from all routers will be accepted enable Enables the accept entry for the router specified in the lt ip address gt parameter metric type any Indicates the type of OSPF external routes that will be type type2 accepted from this router route policy Specifies the name of the route policy to be used for policy_name filtering external routes advertised by the specified advertising router before accepting them into the routing table The accept adv rtr command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no accept adv rtr command The no accept adv rtr command is used to configure the router to not accept advertisements from another router in the system The syntax of the no accept adv rtr command is no accept adv rtr lt router ip address gt enable The lt router_ip address gt parameter represents the address of the router from which advertisements will no longer be accepted The value 0 0 0 0 denotes that advertisements from all routers will be blocked The no accept adv rtr command is executed in the Router Configuration mode area command The area command is used to configure OSPF area parameters The syntax of the area command is area lt ip address g
177. ess are attached to the VLAN When routing is enabled in L3 mode every L3 VLAN is capable of routing as well as carrying the management traffic The user can use any L3 VLAN instead of the Management VLAN to manage the switch This section covers the commands that are used to set up and configure routable VLANs interface vlan command The interface vlan command only takes to the interface config mode The ip routing command in the interface config mode enables routing on a specific vlan The syntax for the interface VLAN command is interface vlan lt 1 4094 gt The interface VLAN command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode ip address command The ip address command enables routing on a VLAN The syntax for the ip address command is ip address lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt lt 1 256 gt secondary The ip address command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode The following table describes the parameters for this command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 57 ip address parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt The IP address to attach to the VLAN lt W X Y Z gt The subnet mask to attach to the VLAN lt 1 256 gt The MAC offset value Specify the value 1 for the Management VLAN only
178. et 1 48 spanning tree stp 1 learning disable 2 Configuration for R2 MLT CONFIGURATION config t mlt 1 member 2 1 2 2 mlt 1 enable vlan port 2 2 2 2 tagging enable interface mlt 1 ist enable peer ip 2 1 1 1 vlan 3999 interface fast Ethernet 1 48 smlt 1 VLAN CONFIGURATION config t vlan members remove 1 1 48 2 1 2 2 vlan create 2 type port vlan members remove 2 1 1 1 47 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 2 1 48 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 2 ip address 10 1 20 3 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 20 2 router vrrp ena interface vlan 2 ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 ip vrrp 1 enable ip vrrp 1 backup master enable vlan create 3999 type port vlan members remove 3999 1 1 1 47 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 3999 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 3999 ip address 2 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 PORT CONFIGURATION PHASE II config t mlt spanning tree 1 stp all learning disable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 204 IP Routing Configuration and Management interface fast Ethernet 1 48 spanning tree stp 1 learning disable Equal Cost Multipath ECMP Equal Cost Multipath ECMP is an IP feature for load balancing routed IP traffic across up to four equal cost paths for each supported protocol ECMP supports OSPF RIP and static routes Some benefits of using ECMP e Supporte
179. et in the fields provided 6 Click Insert End IP routing IP routing tasks are performed in the JDM using the IP screen To open the IP screen select IP Routing gt IP from the menu This screen is illustrated below IP screen Ghtas Addresses Ro tes Zt tiz Routes ARP ARP i tertaces ARP Inspecion VLAM A22 Inspectior po TOF CP Con ectio s JD Lezenes COMP Fornardng ferwcrd g C not forwzrd g DerakTTL 54 Rensi menit iiser ARPI Time 260 5 350ri This section outlines the various tabs on this screen and their use in IP routing configuration Globals tab The Globals tab is used to configure global IP routing information To configure this information follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the Globals tab This tab is illustrated below 7 921671209 n O O E Ghas Addresses Ro tes Stati Po tes ARP ARP c tertoces ARP Inspecsion VLAN A23 Inspestior po TEF CP Con ectio s JD Lezene s COMP Fornardng co ferwcrd g C not forwerd g DeraucTTL 54 Reesaimecit iiser ARPS Time 260 5 38008 2 In the fields provided enter the necessary configuration information The following table outlines the fields on this tab Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Netwo
180. ether the user defined critical IP address is enabled If the user defined critical IP address is not enabled a default critical IP address of 0 0 0 0 will be used The IP address of the interface that will cause a shutdown event BackupMasterEnabled Indicates whether the backup master functionality is enabled on this interface Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 282 IP Routing Configuration and Management BackupMasterState Indicates the state of the backup master functionality FastAdvertisementEnabled Indicates if the Faster Advertisement Interval should be used The default value is false FastAdvertisementinterval The fast advertisement interval in milliseconds between sending advertisement messages This is an integer value between 200 and 1000 The default value is 200 3 Click Apply End Graphing VRRP interface information Statistical information about the VRRP interface can be viewed and graphed on the Interfaces tab To view and graph this statistical information use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt VRRP from the Device Manager menu The VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected Select the Interfaces tab This tab is illustrated above 2 Select a listed interface and click Graph 3 The VRRP Stats dialog
181. f authentication type message digest simple none The ip ospf authentication type command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf cost command The ip ospf cost command is used to assign a cost to an interface The syntax of the ip ospf cost command is ip ospf cost lt interface cost gt The lt interface cost gt parameter is the cost assigned to the interface This is an integer value between 1 and 65535 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 97 The ip ospf cost command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf dead interval command The ip ospf dead interval command is used to configure a dead interval for the interface This is the interval of time that a Hello packet has not been transmitted from this interface before its neighbors declare it down The syntax of the ip ospf dead interval command is ip ospf dead interval lt interval gt The lt interval gt parameter represents the amount of time in seconds to set this interval at This is an integer value between 0 and 2147483647 The ip ospf dead interval command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf hello interval command The ip ospf hello interval command is used to configure the amount of time between transmission of hello packets from this i
182. face The syntax of the ip ospf transmit delay command is ip ospf transmit delay lt interval gt The lt interval gt parameter is the transmit delay in seconds This is an integer value between 0 and 3600 The ip ospf transmit delay command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf message digest key command The ip ospf message digest key command is used to define the MD5 keys referenced in the ip ospf primary md5 key command The syntax of the ip ospf message digest key command is ip ospf message digest key lt key number gt md5 lt key value gt The lt key number gt parameter represents the MD5 key to be configured This is an integer value between 1 and 255 The lt key_value gt parameter represents the value of the key being configured This is a string value of up to 16 characters in length The ip ospf message digest key command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode OSPF show commands OSPF functionality provides a wide range of commands used to display statistics and configured parameters for the router These commands are available for use in any command mode OSPF Show commands are outlined in the table below OSPF show commands Command Description show ip ospf Displays general information on OSPF configuration show ip ospf accept Displays information on OSPF advertising routers show ip ospf area Displays configuration information about the lt ip_address gt OSPF area
183. faces used for this configuration are ethernet therefore the OSPF interfaces are broadcast e The interface priority value on R5 is set to 0 therefore R5 cannot become a designated router DR e Configure the OSPF Router Priority so that R1 becomes the DR priority of 100 and R2 becomes backup designated router BDR with a priority value of 50 Stub and NSSA areas are used to reduce the LSDB size by excluding external LSAs The stub ABR advertises a default route into the stub area for all external routes The following list outlines the commands used to create the illustrated configuration A similar listing could be provided by using the show running config command 1 R1 configuration commands STP Phase 1 spanning tree stp 2 create spanning tree stp 3 create Spanning tree cost calc mode dotld spanning tree port mode normal spanning tree stp 1 priority 8000 spanning tree stp 1 hello time 2 spanning tree stp 1 max age 20 spanning tree stp 1 forward time 15 spanning tree stp 1 tagged bpdu disable tagged bpdu vid 4001 spanning tree stp 1 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 spanning tree stp priority 8000 spanning tree stp hello time 2 spanning tree stp Max age 20 spanning tree stp forward time 15 spanning tree stp tagged bpdu enable tagged bpdu vid 4002 spanning tree stp multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 spanning tree stp priority 8000 spanning tree stp hello time 2 spanning tree stp max age 20 spanning tree s
184. fault timeout value is 180 seconds The command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip triggered command The ip rip triggered command is used to enable triggered updates on this RIP interface The syntax of the ip rip triggered command is ip rip triggered enable The ip rip triggered command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip triggered command The no ip rip triggered command is used to disable triggered updates on this RIP interface The syntax of the no ip rip triggered command is no ip rip triggered enable The no ip rip triggered command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode show ip rip command The show ip rip command is used to display configuration and statistical information about RIP The syntax of the show ip rip command is show ip rip interface Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 77 Use the interface key word to display RIP statistics by interface Omission of this key word displays general RIP information The show ip rip command is executed in the Global Configuration mode default router rip command The default router rip command is used to return the switch to the default global RIP state disabled The syntax of the default router rip command is default router rip ena
185. fig router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 20 2 Configure VRRP VIP address for VLAN2 of R1 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router vrrp ena 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 5530 24TFD config ip vrrp 1 enable 5530 24TFD config ip vrrp 1 backup master enable Note Fast advertisement is disabled by default Fast advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds ms with a default of 200 If fast VRRP advertisement is desired enable fast advertisement Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 199 3 Configure the IST VLAN for router R2 a Configure IST VLAN 3999 on R2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan create 3999 type port 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3999 5530 24TFD config if ip address 2 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 b Configure IST MLT on R2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config mlt 1 member 2 1 2 2 5530 24TFD config mlt 1 enable 5530 24TFD config vlan port 2 1 2 2 tagging enable c Configure an IST peer for R2 and add the IST to VLAN 3999 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface mlt 1 5530 24TFD config if ist enable peer ip 2 1 1 2 vlan 3999 4 Configure VRRP a
186. figuration at the switch level ip routing command The ip routing command enables global routing at the switch level The syntax for the ip routing command is ip routing The ip routing command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode no ip routing command The no ip routing command disables IP routing The syntax for the no ip routing command is no ip routing The no ip routing command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode ip blocking mode command Use this command to set the level of IP blocking to perform in the stack The syntax for this command is ip blocking mode full none The following table outlines the parameters for this command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 56 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip blocking mode parameters Parameter Description full Select this parameter to set IP blocking to full This never allows a duplicate IP address in a stack none Select this parameter to set IP blocking to none This allows duplicate IP addresses unconditionally This command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Layer 3 routable VLANs The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series are Layer 3 L3 switches This means that a regular L2 VLAN becomes a routable L3 VLAN if an IP address and MAC addr
187. figure OSPF interfaces use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Interfaces tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog Interfaces tab 192 168 249 46 OSPF x Link State Database Ext Link State Database Area A te Redistribute Message Digest Stats General Areas Stub Area Metrics If Metrics Neighbors IpAddress Areald Adminstat State RtrPriority DesignatedRouter BackupDesignatedRouter AuthType gt oa a com Orow s 2 Using the fields provided configure the OSPF interface These fields are described in the table below Interfaces tab fields IpAddress The IP address of the OSPF interface Areald The unique ID of the area to which the interface connects Area ID 0 0 0 0 indicates the OSPF backbone AdminStat The administrative status of the OSPF interface State Correct DR state of the OSPF interface DR BDR OtherDR Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 236 IP Routing Configuration and Management Field Description RtrPriority The priority of the interface Used in multi access networks this field is used in the designated router election algorithm The value 0 signifies that the router is not eligible to become the des
188. g 13 IP blocking 45 IP routing commands 55 IP Routing Configuration and Management 51 IP routing screens 209 IP routing using VLANs 16 Management VLAN 20 Multicast membership pages 312 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 27 August 2007 Index 315 N Non local static routes 23 O OSPF 27 OSPF commands 82 OSPF configuration examples 134 OSPF host route 29 OSPF screens 228 P Preface 9 Proxy ARP 22 Proxy ARP commands 66 R ReasmTimeout field 210 Related publications 10 RIP 23 RIP commands 67 RIP configuration examples 122 RIP screens 222 Routable VLAN commands 56 Routable VLAN screens 206 Route policies 35 Route policy commands 101 Route policy screens 264 S Software updates 11 stacking support 44 Static route commands 59 Static routes 22 Subnet addressing 14 Switch platforms U UDP broadcast forwarding 38 UDP broadcast forwarding commands 113 UDP broadcast forwarding screens 288 V virtual link 31 virtual link creation automatic 243 VRRP 37 VRRP commands 104 VRRP configuration examples 190 VRRP screens 277 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 316 Index Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Rout
189. g Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 242 IP Routing Configuration and Management Virtual interface tab 192 1G7 120 24 OSPF a xl Link S ate Dazabase Ext Link State Database I Arca N Redisttibute Meszzcc Dect Vetual F Message Diges Stats General Areas Stan Area Wetrics tafaces If Mecties Neckkers Virtus F l vrtual Neighbors Hosts Areald Neighbor Transt2elay Retrarsinterval ellotnterva RtrDeadinterval ALtaTy2 FrmaryMdskey ivexs erly Retrech incat gt 22 My E ciose Hep Canrct nodfy etzibutes fer automatically created ype auzomazic vrzual interfaces Primaryidicsy please refer to vrcual IF Massage gest table 4 Click Insert The OSPF Insert Virtual If dialog opens Insert virtual Interracs dialog x Areald r Neighbor TransitDelay fi 0 3600 sec RetransInterval g 0 3600 sec HelloInterval fio 1 65535 sec RtrDeadinterval feo 0 2147483647 sec AuthType AuthKe j close Heb 5 Enter the information in the fields on the Virtual If window OSPF Insert Virtual Interface fields Description Areald Specifies the unique identifier of the area connected to the interface TIP an area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the OSPF backbone Neighbor Specifies the ID of adjacent reachable routers TransitDelay Specif
190. g is an example for deleting an auto virtual link Deleting auto virtual link R3 R1 config router no auto vlink Example 1 R1 config show ip ospf Router ID 1 0 0 0 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status True AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 0 External Link State Checksum 0 0x0 Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 67 New Link State Advertisements Received 722 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled config router no auto vlink Example 2 R3 config show ip ospf Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 35 Router ID 3 0 1 0 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status True AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 0 External Link State Checksum 0 0x0 Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 67 New Link State Advertisements Received 722 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled Virtual Link can also be configured using the Java Device Manager JDM Just go under IP Routi
191. g will occur Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 46 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols The stack will continue to run normally with the base unit controlling Layer 3 and DRP functionality lf the non operational non base unit does not rejoin the stack no Layer 3 or DRP functionality will run on it IGMP snooping The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can sense Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP host membership reports from attached stations and use this information to set up a dedicated path between the requesting station and a local IP Multicast router After the pathway is established the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch blocks the IP Multicast stream from exiting any other port that does not connect to another host member thus conserving bandwidth The following section describes how Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switches provide the same benefit as IP Multicast routers but in the local area IGMP is used by IP Multicast routers to learn about the existence of host group members on their directly attached subnets see RFC 2236 The IP Multicast routers get this information by broadcasting IGMP queries and listening for IP hosts reporting their host group memberships This process is used to set up a client server relationship between an IP Mult
192. ght 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 237 Field Description RtrDeadInterval The number of seconds that a router s Hello packets have not been transmitted before the router neighbors declare it down This value should be some multiple of the Hello interval and must be the same for all routers attached to the common network This is an integer value between 0 and 2147483647 and must be multiple of the Hellolnterval value Polllnterval The number of seconds allocated between polls AdvertiseWhenDown Indicates if this interface advertises even when it is non operational Mtulgnore Indicates whether the MTU value is ignored Events The number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state or an error has occurred 3 Click Apply End Interface Metric configuration The If Metrics tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF interface metrics To configure OSPF interface metrics use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the If Metrics tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog If Metrics tab xi Area Aggregate Redistribute Message Digest Stats Neighbors Link State Database Ext Link State Database General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces e a i a gt 0 rows 2 Using the fields provided configure the interface metrics
193. gt parameter is an integer value between 1 and 255 The ip osp primary md5 key command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf priority command The ip ospf priority command is used to assign a priority to the interface for the purposes of Designated Router election The syntax of the ip ospf priority command is ip ospf priority lt priority value gt The lt priority value gt parameter is the priority value assigned to the interface This is an integer value between 0 and 255 The ip ospf priority command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf retransmit interval command The ip ospf retransmit interval command is used to define the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this interface The syntax of the ip ospf retransmit interval command is ip ospf retransmit interval lt interval gt The lt interval gt parameter is the number of seconds between retransmissions This is an integer value between 0 and 3600 The ip ospf retransmit interval command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 99 ip ospf transmit delay command The ip ospf transmit delay command is used to define the transmit delay for this OSPF inter
194. guration RIP configuration tasks RIP is configured on a VLAN or brouter port basis This section presents the steps in RIP configuration and accompanying command syntax examples To configure RIP on an interface perform the following steps Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 123 Note The command examples below demonstrate the configuration of RIP on a VLAN Step Action 1 Configure the interface assign an IP address and add ports 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan create 51 name VLAN 51 type port 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 10 1 1 255 255 255 0 5530 24TFD config if exit 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 51 8 9 2 Enable RIP Note Perform one of the following command sequences to enable RIP 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable OR 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router rip 5530 24TFD config router network 10 10 1 1 3 Disable Supply RIP Updates if required 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 51 5530 24TFD config if ip rip supply disable 4 Disable Listen for RIP Updates
195. gust 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 159 mlt spanning tree mlt spanning tree mlt spanning tree mlt spanning tree 1 k k L3 stp 2 learning normal stp 1 learning normal stp 2 learning normal stp 1 learning normal unNN EF no ip directed broadcast enable ip routing interface vlan 1 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 100 ip address 10 1 1 17 255 255 255 252 2 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 101 ip address 10 1 1 9 255 255 255 252 3 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 102 ip address 10 1 1 22 255 255 255 252 4 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit ip arp timeout 360 ip dhcp relay ip blocking mode none l ECMP maximum path 1 rip maximum path 1 ospf maximum path 1 I OSPF router ospf enable router ospf router id 1 1 1 2 no as boundary router enable no trap enable timers basic holddown 10 rfc1583 compatibility enable default cost ethernet 100 default cost fast ethernet 10 default cost gig ethernet 1 default cost ten gig ethernet 1 area 0 0 0 2 import noexternal Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5
196. gust 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 169 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 104 ip address 10 1 1 26 255 255 255 252 3 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit ip arp timeout 360 ip dhcp relay ip blocking mode none I OSPF router ospf enable router ospf router id 1 1 1 4 no as boundary router enable no trap enable timers basic holddown 10 rfc1583 compatibility enable default cost ethernet 100 default cost fast ethernet 10 default cost gig ethernet 1 default cost ten gig ethernet 1 area 0 0 0 0 import external area 0 0 0 0 import summaries enable area 0 0 0 3 import external area 0 0 0 3 import summaries enable exit enable configure terminal interface vlan 101 ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf transmit delay 1 ip ospf retransmit interval 5 ip ospf hello interval 10 ip ospf dead interval 40 ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 104 ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyr
197. h 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 41 If a DHCP client is connected to a routable interface to configure DHCP requests to be sent to up to 512 different routable interfaces or 512 different server IP addresses enable DHCP on the client agent address and then enable DHCP from the client to each of the interfaces or IP addresses server addresses In the example shown in Multiple BootP DHCP servers page 41 two DHCP servers are located on two different subnets To configure the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series to forward the copies of the BootP DHCP packets from the end station to both servers specify the switch 10 10 1 254 as the agent address Then enable DHCP to each of the DHCP servers by entering 10 10 2 1 and 10 10 3 1 as the server addresses Multiple BootP DHCP servers 10 10 1 254 24 10 10 2 254 24 DHCP server End station a lt 10 10 2 1 24 thernet Routing Swite 10 10 1 1 24 Zz 5500 Series Subnet 1 Subnet J CI vani Jy 7 es TA VLAN 2 Hoe jic DHOP server 10 10 3 1 24 Subnet 3 a Ea 3 s J C 11240EA Setting DHCP To set DHCP take the following steps Step Action 1 Enable IP routing on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series and on the target VLAN interface 2 Enable DHCP globally Note DHCP is enabled by default
198. h counters TIP If no VLAN is specified the command clears OSPF global counters Note The clear ip ospf counters command is applicable only to the base unit in a stack The syntax for the clear ip ospf counters command is clear ip ospf counters lt 1 4094 gt where the optional parameter lt 1 4094 gt is the VLAN ID The clear ip ospf counters command is executed in the Configuration mode Route policy commands Route policies are a Nortel proprietary improvement on existing routing schemes Using existing routing schemes packets are forwarded based on routes that have been learned by the router through routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF or through the introduction of static routes Route policies introduce the ability to forward packets based on rule sets created by the network administrator These rule sets or policies are then applied to the learned or static routes This section describes the configuration and management of route policies using the Command Line Interface ip prefix list command The ip prefix 1list command is used to configure up to four prefix lists for use in route policies The syntax of the ip prefix list command is ip prefix list lt prefix name gt lt ip address mask gt ge lt mask_from gt le lt mask_to gt name lt new prefix name gt The following table describes the parameters for this command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols
199. hbor InterfaceAddr The neighbor s interface address 3 Click Refresh to update the information End Virtual interface information Use the Virtual If tab of the OSPF dialog to view virtual interface information Use the following procedure to view OSPF Virtual Interface information LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 240 IP Routing Configuration and Management Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog opens 2 Select the Virtual If tab The Virtual If tab is illustrated below Virtual If tab i 7 i E 192 167 120 9 OSPF x Link State Database Ext Link State Database Area Aggregate Redistribute Messaoe Diaest Virtual If Message Digest Stats General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces IFMetrics Neighbors VirtuallF virtual Neighbors Hosts Areata Nethbor TranstDelay Reransnteval Helontrval RuDeadineerval AuthType Authkey Primarymasey state Everts Type Apply Refresh Insert Delete B a g Close Heb Can not modify attributes for automatically created type automatic virtual interfaces PrimaryMd5key please refer to Virtual IF Message Digest table Drow s 3 Use the fields on the tab as described in the following table to view the Virtual Interfac
200. he command no area lt ip address gt import summaries enable no area command The no area command is used to disable configured OSPF area parameters The syntax of the no area command is no area lt ip address gt import summaries enable range subnet mask nssa entlink summary link The following table outlines the parameters for this command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 87 no area parameters Parameter Description ip_address Specifies the Area ID expressed as IP address A B C D import summaries Controls the import of summary link state advertisements enable into stub areas This setting has no effect on other areas range subnet_mask Used to specify range parameters for the OSPF area nssa entlink summary link The no area command is executed in the Router Configuration mode Note The configuration of a totally stubby area no summary advertising is a two step process First define an area with the import flag set to noexternal Second disable import summaries in the same area with the command no area lt ip address gt import summaries enable as boundary router command The as boundary router command is used to denote a router as an Autonomous System Boundary Router The syntax of the as boundary router co
201. hin a stub area is based on the default route that is originated by the stub area ABR Summary LSA type 3 Import summary can be disabled on a stub area ABR to further prevent redistribution of summary routes from other areas into the stub area In this case the stub area ABR advertises only default routes into the stub area Note Disabling import summaries is only allowed in the stub area As shown in the following figure a stub area has only one ABR All packets that are destined to be forwarded outside the stub area are routed to the stub areas border exit point where the ABR first examines the packets and then forwarded to a destination OSPF stub area ASBR Summary LSAs LSA Type 3 from Area 0 LSA Type 5 Not supported in Summary LSAs Stub Area with default route all external routes Stub Area are relaced with one 0 0 0 1 default route Normal Area Summary LSAs 0 0 0 0 LSA Type 3 from Area 1 Legend E Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 Note Stub areas do not support ASBRs In all routers attached to the stub area the area must be configured as a stub area In the configuration example illustrated below the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series R1 is configured in Stub Area 2 and R2 is configured as a Stub ABR for Area 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyrigh
202. hronized with the non base unit The database in the non base units are deleted during the exchange e Only the policies stored in the base unit are used by RIP and OSPF for policy application Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP is designed to eliminate the single point of failure that can occur when the single static default gateway router for an end station is lost VRRP introduces the concept of a virtual IP address transparent to users shared between two or more routers connecting a common subnet to the enterprise network With the virtual IP address as the default gateway on end hosts VRRP provides dynamic default gateway redundancy in the event of failure VRRP uses the following terms VRRP router a router running the VRRP protocol Virtual router the abstract object managed by VRRP that is assigned the virtual IP address and that acts as the default router for a set of IP addresses across a common network Each virtual router is assigned a virtual router ID e Virtual router master the VRRP router that assumes responsibility for forwarding packets sent to the IP address associated with the virtual router The master router also responds to packets sent to the virtual router IP address and answers ARP requests for this IP address e Virtual router backup the router or routers that can serve as the failover router if the master router becomes unavailable If the mast
203. ht 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 195 c Configure an IP address for VLAN 3 Add IP address 10 1 21 3 255 255 255 0 to VLAN 3 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 1 21 3 255 255 255 0 d Configure an OSPF interface for VLAN 3 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 21 3 e Configure VRRP on VLAN 3 The VRRP VIP address of 10 1 21 1 is added to VLAN 2 using a VRID of 2 Note Fast advertisement is disabled by default Fast advertisement is proprietary to Nortel to support an advertisement interval from 200 to 1000 milliseconds ms with a default of 200 If fast VRRP advertisement is desired enable fast advertisement 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router vrrp ena 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp address 2 10 1 21 1 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 2 enable End After the VRRP configuration has been completed use the show ip vrrp and show ip vrrp interface verbose commands to display VRRP configuration information and statistics Configuration command listing This following list is a complete sequence of the commands used in this configuration 1 VLAN Configuration for Router R1 config t vlan create 2 type port vlan members remove 2 1 1 1 14 2 1 2 8 3 1 3
204. ialog is illustrated below Insert Protocols dialog 192 168 249 46 UDP_Forward Insert Probocolse lt PortNumber fil 1 65535 Name Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 289 4 Using the provided fields configure the new UDP protocol These fields are outlined in the following table Insert Protocols dialog fields Field Description S PortNumber The port the new UDP protocol will use The name associated with the UDP protocol 5 Click Insert End UDP forwarding configuration The Forwardings tab of the UDP Forward dialog is used to assign a server IP address to a previously configured protocol To configure a UDP forwarding use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager menu The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab selected Select the Forwardings tab This tab is illustrated below UDP Forward dialog Forwardings tab x Protocols Forwardings Forwarding Lists Broadcast Interfaces DestPort DestAddr Id FwdListIdList i 69 192 168 249 46 eo fw Gl co 1 row s 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Forwardings dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configur
205. icast source that provides the data streams and the clients that want to receive the data By default unknown multicast traffic is flooded to all ports in a VLAN In situations in which there is a multicast transmitter that is not doing IGMP and there are no multicast receivers the traffic transmitted by the transmitter is flooded The CLI commands for IGMP allow the sending of all unknown multicast traffic to IGMP static router ports only This traffic will not be forwarded to dynamically discovered m router ports If it is desirable to forward unknown unicast traffic to certain ports only those ports can be set as static m router ports e When disabled the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch treats unknown multicast traffic as it does broadcast traffic flood This is the default behavior e User settings for the Unknown Multicast No Flood feature is stored in NVRAM In a stack if settings on different units differ the Base Unit setting will take precedence This feature can be enabled or disabled at any time Nortel Networks recommends this feature be enabled when IGMP snooping is enabled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IGMP snooping 47 IP multicast propagation with IGMP routing page 47 shows how IGMP is used to set up the path between the client and server As shown in
206. icy to this RIP interface The syntax of the ip rip out policy command is ip rip out policy lt policy name gt The lt policy name gt parameter represents the name of a previously configured switch policy The ip rip out policy command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip out policy command The no ip rip out policy command is used to remove an out policy from the RIP interface The syntax of the no ip rip out policy command is no ip rip out policy lt policy name gt The lt policy name gt parameter represents the name of a previously configured switch policy The no ip rip out policy command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip poison command The ip rip poison command is used to enable poison reverse on this RIP interface The syntax of the ip rip poison command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 74 IP Routing Configuration and Management o _ lt SLL ee ip rip poison enable The ip rip poison command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip poison command The no ip rip poison command is used to disable poison reverse on this RIP interface The syntax of the no ip rip poison command is no ip rip poison enable The no ip rip poison command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip p
207. ies the estimated number of seconds required to transmit a link state update packet over the virtual interface Transit delay is expressed as an integer between 0 3600 The default value is 0 RetransInterval Specifies the number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to the virtual interface The retransmit interval is also used to transmit database description and link state request packets The retransmit interval is expressed as an interval between 0 3600 The default value is 5 Hellolnterval Specifies the interval in seconds between the Hello packets sent by the router on the virtual interface TIP This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network The hello interval is expressed as an integer between 1 65535 The default value is 10 RtrDeadInterval Specifies the number of seconds since a router last transmitted hello packets before neighbor routers declare it down The retransmit dead interval is expressed as an integer between 0 2147483647 The default value is 60 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 243 Field Description AuthType Specifies the interface authentication type The available authentication types are none simple password or MD5 If you select simplePass
208. ig interface vlan 100 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy Policy Default End Controlling NSSA external route advertisements In an OSPF NSSA the NSSA N p bit in the OSPF hello packets Options field is used to tell the ABR which external routes can be advertised to other areas When the NSSA N p bit is set true the ABR exports the external route This is the default setting for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series When the NSSA N p bit is not set true the ABR drops the external route A route policy can be created on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series to manipulate the N p bit value For example the illustration below shows a RIP network located in NSSA 2 If advertising the 15 15 15 0 24 network to area 0 is the only desired action perform the following tasks e Enable R1 as an OSPF ASBR e Create NSSA area 0 0 0 2 e Create a route policy to advertise OSPF and direct interfaces to RIP e Create a route policy to only advertise RIP network 15 15 15 0 24 to area 0 by using the NSSA N p bit Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 151 External route advertisement example AS Area dO NSSA Area 2 10 1 1 20 30 LELS RIPv2 pangs E 14 14 14 0 30 20 11 2180 2 18 10 4 4 16 90 17 Ryne 15 15 15 0 30 1 20 2 6 ASBR E
209. igest information Use the Virtual If Message Digest tab of the OSPF dialog to view OSPF virtual message digest settings To view OSPF virtual message digest settings use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog opens Select the Virtual If Message Digest tab See the following illustration of Virtual If Message Digest tab Virtual If Message Digest tab 192 167 120 9 OSPF E j x Virtual Neighbors Hosts Link State Database Ext Link State Database General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces IFMetrics Neiahbors Virtual If Area Aggregate Redistribute Message Digest Virtual IF Message Digest Stats lt lt Max 2 keys are allowed For each virtual interface Areald Neighbor Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 259 3 Use the fields in the following table to view Virtual If Message Digest information Virtual If Message Digest fields Field Description Areald Specifies the ID of the area associated with the virtual interface message digest entry Neighbor Specifies the IP address of the neighbor router associated with the virtual interface message digest entry Specifies the index value of the virtual interface message
210. ight 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 170 IP Routing Configuration and Management no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 1 ip ospf area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable no ip ospf enable exit 5 R5 configuration commands 1 STP Phase 1 spanning tree cost calc mode dotld spanning tree port mode normal spanning tree stp 1 priority 8000 spanning tree stp 1 hello time 2 spanning tree stp 1 max age 20 Spanning tree stp 1 forward time 15 spanning tree stp 1 tagged bpdu disable tagged bpdu vid 4001 spanning tree stp 1 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 I VLAN vlan configcontrol autopvid auto pvid vlan name 1 VLAN 1 vlan create 100 name VLAN 100 type port vlan create 1000 name VLAN 1000 type port vlan ports 1 26 tagging unTagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan members 1 24 26 vlan members 100 5 6 vlan members 1000 10 vlan ports 1 4 pvid 1 vlan ports 5 6 pvid 100 vlan ports 7 9 pvid 1 vlan ports 10 pvid 1000 vlan ports 11 26 pvid 1 vlan igmp unknown mcast no flood disable vlan igmp 1 snooping disable vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 100 snooping disable vlan igmp 100 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 1000 snooping disa
211. ignated router on this network In the event of a tie in this value routers will use their Router ID as a tie breaker This is an integer value between 0 and 255 DesignatedRouter The IP address of the Designated Router BackupDesignatedRouter The IP address of the Backup Designated Router Type The OSPF interface type The options available are broadcast or passive AuthType The interface authentication type The options available are none simplePassword or md5 AuthKey The interface authentication key This key is for when AuthType is simplePassword PrimaryMd5Key The MD5 primary key if it exists Otherwise this field will display 0 Hellolnterval The interval in seconds between the Hello packets sent by the router on this interface This value must be the same for all routers attached to a common network This is an integer value between 1 and 65535 TransitDelay The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this interface This is an integer value between 0 and 3600 Retransinterval The number of seconds between link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this interface This value is also used when retransmitting database description and link state request packets This is an integer value between 0 and 3600 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyri
212. ination in the AS Routing information from outside the AS appears on the tree as leaves OSPF routes IP traffic based solely on the destination IP address and subnet mask contained in the IP packet header I LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 28 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Benefits Benefits in large networks OSPF offers the following benefits Fast convergence In the event of topological changes OSPF recalculates routes quickly Minimal routing protocol traffic Unlike distance vector routing protocols such as RIP OSPF generates a minimum of routing protocol traffic Load sharing OSPF provides support for equal cost multipath routing If several equal cost routes to a destination exist traffic is distributed equally among them Because OSPF does not use hop count in its calculation the routing domain is scalable OSPF routing algorithm A separate copy of the OSPF routing algorithm runs in each area Routers which are connected to multiple areas run multiple copies of the algorithm The sequence of processes governed by the routing algorithm is as follows 1 When a router starts it initializes the OSPF data structures and then waits for indications from lower level protocols that its interfaces are functional A router then uses the Hello Protocol to discover neighb
213. ing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 130 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5530 24TFD config if ip rip receive version rip2 End Using RIP accept policies RIP accept policies are used on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series to selectively accept routes from RIP updates If no policies are defined the default behavior is applied This default behavior is to add all learned routes to the route table RIP accept policies are used to e Listen to RIP updates only from certain gateways e Listen only for specific networks e Assign a specific mask to be included with a network in the routing table such as a network summary In the configuration illustrated below the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series ERS1 is configured with a RIP accept policy This creates a single route directed to ERS3 for all networks configured on it The accept policy accepts any network from 10 1 240 0 to 10 1 255 0 and creates a single entry in the routing table on ERS1 A summary route is calculated by comparing the common bits in the address range to derive the summary address For example if the range of IP addresses is from 10 1 240 0 to 10 1 255 0 1 Determine the third octet of the first address 10 1 240 0 1111 0000 2 Determine the third octet of the ending address 10 1 255 0 1111 1111 3 Extract the common bits 240 1111 0000 255 1
214. ing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 189 3 Init The router received a general hello packet without its Router ID from another router 4 2 Way The router received a Hello directed to it from another router The hello contains its Router ID 5 ExStart Indicates the start of the Master Slave election process 6 Exchange Indicates the link state database LSDB is exchanged 7 Loading Indicates the processing state of the LSDB for input into the routing table The router can request LSA for missing or corrupt routes 8 Full Indicates the normal full adjacency state OSPF neighbor state information Neighbor state information can be accessed by using the show ip ospf neighbor command 5530 24TFD show ip ospf neighbor Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm 10 1 1 22 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 21 100 Full 0 Dyn 10 1 1 17 1 1 1 5 10 1 1 18 0 Full 0 Dyn 10 1 1 9 1 1 1 4 10 1 1 10 1 Full 0 Dyn Problems with OSPF occur most often during the initial startup when the router cannot form adjacencies with other routers and the state is stuck in the Init or ExStart Exchange state Init State Problems A router can become stuck in an Init state and not form adjacencies There are several possible causes for this problem e Authentication mismatch or configuration problem e Area mismatch for Stub or NSSA e Area ID
215. ing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved Publication NN47200 503 Document status Standard Document version 03 01 Document date 27 August 2007 To provide feedback or report a problem in this document go to http www nortel com documentfeedback Sourced in Canada and the United States of America The information in this document is subject to change without notice Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant Nortel Nortel Networks the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks NORTEL
216. ing table Insert Route Policy fields Field Description Id The index value used to uniquely identify a group of policies SequenceNumber The secondary index value assigned to individual policies inside a larger policy group Name The name associated with this policy Enable Indicates whether the policy is enabled Disabled policies should be used for routing Mode Specifies the action to be taken when this policy is selected for a specific route A value of permit indicates that the route will be used while deny indicates that the route will be ignored MatchProtocol Select the appropriate protocol RIP Static Direct OSPF or Any If configured matches the protocol through which the route is learned This field is used only for RIP announce purposes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 271 MatchNetwork If configured the switch matches the destination network against the contents of the specified prefix list MatchlpRouteSource If configured matches the next hop IP address for RIP routes and advertising router IDs for OSPF routes against the contents of the specified prefix list This option is ignored for all other route types MatchNextHop If configured matches the next hop IP address of the route against the content
217. ing virtual address enable command The no ping virtual address enable command is used to disable ICMP echo replies from VRRP associated addresses The syntax of the no ping virtual address enable command is no ping virtual address enable The no ping virtual address enable command is executed in the Router Configuration mode send trap enable command The send trap enable command is used to enable the sending of SNMP notifications after virtual router state changes The syntax of the send trap enable command is send trap enable The send trap enable command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no send trap enable command The no send trap enable command is used to disable the sending of SNMP notifications after virtual router state changes The syntax of the no send trap enable command is no send trap enable The no send trap enable command is executed in the Router Configuration mode ip vrrp address command The ip vrrp address command is used to associated an IP address with a virtual router ID The syntax of the ip vrrp address command is ip vrrp address lt vr_id gt lt ip address gt The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured This is a value between 1 and 255 The lt ip_ address gt parameter represents the address to be used in the association Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 200
218. int command The ip vrrp fast adv int command is used to set the interval used in the VRRP fast advertisement functionality The syntax of the ip vrrp fast adv int command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt fast adv int lt interval gt The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The lt interval gt parameter represents the fast advertisement interval This is a value in milliseconds between 200 and 1000 The ip vrrp fast adv int command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp holddown timer command The ip vrrp holddown timer command is used to set the VRRP holddown timer The syntax of the ip vrrp holddown timer command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt holddown timer lt timer value gt The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The lt timer value gt parameter represents the holddown timer value This is a value in seconds between 0 and 21600 The ip vrrp holddown timer command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 110 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip vrrp priority command The ip vrrp priority command is used to assign a priority to a virtual router The syntax of the ip vrrp priority command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt priority lt priority value gt The lt vr_id gt
219. ion ee for the network for example rules This is the default 192 1 2 255 send mode for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch RIP Update is formed as a 5500 Series RIP version 2 update including network mask e RIP version 2 rip1 This mode is used to e Destination MAC is a broadcast broadcast RIP updates ff ff ff ff ff ff ial aS complant witi e Destination IP is a broadcast RFC 1058 for the network for example 192 1 2 255 e RIP Update is formed as a RIP version 1 update no network mask included e RIP version 1 rip2 This mode is used to e Destination MAC is a multicast broadcast multicast RIP 01 00 5e 00 00 09 version a Updales e Destination IP is the RIP version 2 multicast address 224 0 0 9 e RIP Update is formed as a RIP version 2 update including network mask e RIP version 2 nosend No RIP updates are sent None on the interface Receive Result Mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 27 rip1 OrRip2 RIP version 1 or RIP version 2 updates are accepted RIP version 1 and RIP version 1 compatible updates only are accepted RIP version 2 updates only are accepted Limitations RIP has the following limitations The protocol is limited to networks whose longest path is 15 hops e The protocol depends on counting to infinity to resolve certain u
220. irming TP Sur Suceibocel 1P Sours Sucrsbesleheses AconzAddr ServorAddr Enaale Mace piv zehesh Inset j De ete fia aaae 2 Select the IP Source Guard port tab The IP Source Guard port window appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 301 IP Source Guard port tab x Dec Relay ZHP snocpirg 2HP snocpreg v am HEP Sxcopng pert O C gt eindngs IF ource GLard part 1p source uars addresses U3 dzabed z oes B 4 Bl z gt ronis To change the port mode select a port Double click the mode box Select ip or disabled O a A Q Click Apply End IP Source Guard addresses To view IP Source Guard address information use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP Relay window opens 2 Select the IP Source Guard addresses tab The IP Source Guard addresses window appears IP Source Guard addresses tab 19251071209 00 x D C elzy DHCP Snzopng DHCP S oozing LAN CHCP Snocprg por DHCP Bndngs IP Source Guard cort IP So rce Guarc addrssses Pot Tyne Eddrace Source tere ome End The following table describes the fields in the IP Source Guard addresses window Nortel Ether
221. is License Agreement You are responsible for the selection of the Software and for the installation of use of and results obtained from the Software 1 Licensed Use of Software Nortel Networks grants Customer a nonexclusive license to use a copy of the Software on only one machine at any one time or to the extent of the activation or authorized usage level whichever is applicable To the extent Software is furnished for use with designated hardware or Customer furnished equipment CFE Customer is granted a nonexclusive license to use Software only on such hardware or CFE as applicable Software contains trade secrets and Customer agrees to treat Software as confidential information using the same care and discretion Customer uses with its own similar information that it does not wish to disclose publish or disseminate Customer will ensure that anyone who uses the Software does so only in compliance with the terms of this Agreement Customer shall not a use copy modify transfer or distribute the Software except as expressly authorized b reverse assemble reverse compile reverse engineer or otherwise translate the Software c create derivative works or modifications unless expressly authorized or d sublicense rent or lease the Software Licensors of intellectual property to Nortel Networks are beneficiaries of this provision Upon termination or breach of the license by Customer or in the event designated hardware or CFE is no longer in us
222. isements results in more CPU cycles required to make forwarding decisions To help reduce these undesired effects an OSPF network can be divided into subdomains called areas An area is made up of a number of OSPF routers that have the same area identification By dividing a network into multiple areas a separate LSDB consisting of router link state advertisements LSA and network LSAs are maintained for each area Each router within an area maintains an LSDB only for the area to which it belongs For example the area router LSAs and network LSAs are not flooded beyond the area borders Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 139 The impact of a topology change is localized to the area in which it occurs The only exception to this is for the area border routers which must maintain an LSDB for each area to which they belong Changes in topology are advertised to the rest of the network by the area border routers by advertising summary LSAs A 32 bit Area ID expressed in IP address format such as 0 0 0 0 for 0 identifies areas Area 0 is also known as the backbone area and is responsible for distributing routing information to all other areas If multiple areas are used they must all be attached to the backbone through an Area Border Router ABR which connects area 0 0 0 0 to
223. it area ID You can configure up to 16 virtual links Note You can modify parameters for manually added virtual links To accept automatic virtual link creation enable automatic virtual link on both endpoint ABRs the default value is disabled Automatic virtual links are removed when the transit area is deleted auto virtual link is disabled or the router is no longer an ABR Note Auto created virtual links use default settings that cannot be modified Example Configuration Consider the following situation Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 33 In this case R4 in Area2 cannot be physically connected to AreaO for some reason and it will be connected to R3 which is NOT a backbone ABR like R1 is for instance As Area2 is not directly connected to backbone Area0 or directly connected to a backbone ABR router clients from Area2 will not be able to access anything outside Area2 Also router R3 is an ABR router connected to two non backbone areas In order to solve these problems virtual link must be configured between router R3 and R1 which are both ABRs Virtual link cannot be configured on non ABR routers Consider the following Router IDs e R1 1 0 0 0 e R3 3 0 1 0 e R4 4 0 2 0 Virtual link can be configured in two ways on ABR routers e Configuring virtual link
224. itch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 272 IP Routing Configuration and Management SetMetric If configured the switch sets the metric value for the route while announcing or redistributing The default import metric is 0 If the default is configured the original cost of the route is advertised into OSPF for RIP the original cost of the route or the default value is used SetMetricType Applicable to OSPF protocol only If configured sets the metric type for the routes to be announced into the OSPF routing protocol that matches this policy The default is type 2 This field is applicable only for OSPF announce policies SetInjectNetList If configured the switch replaces the destination network of the route that matches this policy with the contents of the specified prefix list SetMask Indicates the mask to used for routes that pass the policy matching criteria 5 Click Insert End Route policy deletion To delete a route policy use the following procedure Deleting a route policy Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears Select Policy The Policy dialog opens Select the Route Policy tab Select an Id to delete a A O N Click Delete End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN
225. kets for transmission Specifies the time interval in seconds that a Hello packet has not been transmitted from the virtual interface before its neighbors declare it down Expressed as an integer from 0 2147483647 the default dead interval value is 60 seconds Specifies the time interval in seconds between transmission of Hello packets from the virtual interface Expressed as an integer from 1 65535 the hello interval default value is 10 seconds Specifies the time interval in seconds between link stage advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to the virtual interface Expressed as an integer from 0 3600 the default value is 5 seconds Specifies the estimated number of seconds required to transmit a link state update packet over the virtual interface Expressed as an integer from 0 3600 the default value is 1 second The area vitual 1ink command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no area virtual link command Use the no area virtual link command to delete a virtual interface The syntax for the no area virtual link command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 94 IP Routing Configuration and Management no area virtual link lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt authentication key no area virtual link command parameters Parameter Description lt A
226. ld 4 Click Submit End The VLAN Configuration screen reopens and the settings are saved Displaying multicast membership using the Web based Management Interface Use the following procedure to display Multicast membership in the Web based Management Interface Step Action 1 Open the IGMP Multicast Group Membership window by choosing Applications gt IGMP gt Multicast Group from the menu IGMP Multicast Group Membership window Application gt IGMP gt IGMP Multicast Group Membership Multicast Group Membership Selection View By VLAN fi x Multicast Group Membership Table Multicast Group Address Port 2 Select the VLAN whose membership is to be viewed from the VLAN list in the Multicast Group Membership Selection View By section 3 Click Submit End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Displaying multicast membership using the Web based Management Interface 313 The membership information appears in the Multicast Group Membership Table section The following table describes the IGMP Multicast Group Membership page fields IGMP Multicast Group Membership page fields Section Field Description Multicast Group VLAN Select the VLAN on which to view Membership configured IP addresses Selection View By Mul
227. le The no ip rip default listen command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip default supply command The ip rip default supply command is used to enable the advertisement of default routes on the interface The syntax of the ip rip default supply command is ip rip default supply enable The ip rip default supply command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip default supply command The no ip rip default supply command is used to disable the advertisement of default routes on the interface The syntax of the no ip rip default supply command is no ip rip default supply enable The no ip rip default supply command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 72 IP Routing Configuration and Management nT Tne ee ip rip holddown command The ip rip holddown command is used to set the value of the holddown timer on the RIP interface The syntax of the ip rip holddown command is ip rip holddown lt timer value gt The lt timer_value gt parameter is an integer value between 0 and 360 seconds The ip rip holddown command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip in policy command The ip rip in policy command is used to add an in policy to this RIP interface The syntax of the ip rip in policy
228. letion To delete an automatic Virtual Link use the following procedure Deleting an automatic Virtual Link Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing gt OSPF The OSPF dialog opens 2 On the General tab enter the router ID in the Routerld box for one of the end point ABRs 3 Deselect the AutoVirtLinkEnable box 4 Click Apply 5 Enter the router ID in the Routerld box for the other end point ABR 6 Deselect the AutoVirtLinkEnable box 7 Click Apply End Automatic Virtual Links are also removed when the transit area is deleted or when the router is no longer an ABR Virtual neighbors information Use the Virtual Neighbors tab of the OSPF dialog to view virtual neighbor information Use the following procedure to view OSPF Virtual Neighbors information Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 245 Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog opens 2 Select the Virtual Neighbors tab The Virtual Neighbors tab is illustrated below Virtual Neighbors tab 7 192 157 120 9 OSPF SS xj LinkState Database Ext LinkSate Database AresAggegate Redutrbute MessageDigest Virtual If Messsoe Dioest Stats General Aress Stub Ares Metrics Interfaces if
229. ll learning disable mlt spanning tree 2 stp all learning disable 2 Configuration for R2 MLT CONFIGURATION config t mlt 1 member 2 1 2 2 mlt 1 enable vlan port 2 2 2 2 tagging enable interface mlt 1 ist enable peer ip 2 1 1 1 vlan 3999 mlt 2 member 1 48 1 47 mlt 2 enable interface mlt 2 smlt 1 VLAN CONFIGURATION config t vlan members remove 1 1 47 1 48 2 1 2 2 vlan create 2 type port vlan members remove 2 1 1 1 46 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 2 1 47 1 48 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 2 ip address 10 1 20 3 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 20 2 router vrrp ena interface vlan 2 ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 ip vrrp 1 enable ip vrrp 1 backup master enable vlan create 3999 type port vlan members remove 3999 1 1 1 47 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 3999 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 3999 ip address 2 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 PORT CONFIGURATION PHASE II config t mlt spanning tree 1 stp all learning disable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 202 IP Routing Configuration and Management mlt spanning tree 2 stp all learning disable Configuring VRRP with SLT The following illustration and configuration file examples demonstrate a VRRP configuration with SLT VRRP with SLT configuration R1 VLAN 2 IP 10 1 20 2 24 VRRP VIP 10 1 20 1 vrp back
230. llowing procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP window appears Select the DHCP Bindings tab The DHCP Bindings window appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 300 IP Routing Configuration and Management DHCP Bindings ax E3 D C ekey SHCP Snzopng DECP S ooaing VLAN CHEP Snocpirg por OHCP Bndng T Course Cuard zort IP Source Guare addrcases MacAzdresc AddressTypa Adcress rrterFsce ZaseTireisec HEAS End The following table describes the fields in the DHCP Bindings window Field Description Vlanld Specifies the VLAN ID for the DHCP client MacAddress Specifies the VLAN MAC address for the DHCP client AddressType Specifies the type of address contained in the corresponding binding address Address Specifies the IP address for the DHCP client Interface Specifies the interface to which the DHCP client is connected LeaseTime sec Specifies the DHCP client binding lease time in seconds IP Source Guard port To view IP Source Guard status for ports use the following procedure Step Action 1 From the Device Manager menu select IP Routing gt DHCP The DHCP Relay window appears DHCP Relay tab E D C Relay SHEP Sma pi y CHIP Stee pi g AN DHCP Scopmy pert DC F
231. ls NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 121 This section contains the following topics e Changing the default ARP aging time page 121 e Adding a static ARP entry to a VLAN page 121 e Adding a static ARP entry to a brouter port page 122 e Deleting a static ARP entry page 122 Changing the default ARP aging time The default ARP aging time value is set for 360 minutes To change this default aging time use the ip arp timeout command This command has the following syntax ip arp timeout lt minutes gt The lt minutes gt parameter represents the number of minutes to set for the new timeout setting This is a value in the range of 5 to 360 The following is an example of setting a new default aging time 5530 24TFD config ip arp timeout 180 The new setting can be confirmed by using the show ip routing command Adding a static ARP entry to a VLAN To add a static ARP entry to a VLAN use the ip arp command This command has the following syntax ip arp ip lt ip_ address gt mac lt mac_address gt port lt port number gt vid lt vid_number gt The following table outlines the parameters of this command ip arp parameters vid_number The VLAN ID of the entry The following is an example of adding a static ARP entry to a VLAN 5530 24TFD config ip arp 10 1 1 23 00 00 11 43 54 23 1 48 vid 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Swit
232. lse false 203 203 100 52 1 false false false false true true false false IP Address RIP In Policy 10 1 1 2 10 1 1 25 20 1 1 1 172 1 1 1 203 203 100 52 IP Address RIP Out Policy Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 180 IP Routing Configuration and Management 172 1 1 1 203 203 100 52 IP Address Holddown Timeout 10 1 1 2 120 180 10 1 1 25 120 180 20 1 1 1 120 180 172 1 1 1 120 180 203 203 100 52 120 180 Name Allow Id 1 Seq 1 Match enable enable mode permit match protocol direct ospf match interface match metric 0 match network match next hop match route type any match route sre Set set injectlist set mask 0 0 0 0 set metric 5 set metric type type2 set nssa pbit enable set metric type internal set preference show ip ospf redistribute Source Metric Metric Type Subnet Enabled Route Policy Direct 10 Type 2 Allow True RIP 10 Type 2 Allow True show ip ospf Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 181 Router ID 1 1 1 3 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status False AS Boundary Router Config Status True External Link State Advertisements 2 Exte
233. mand The ip dhcp relay fwd path command sets the mode for the specific forwarding path DHCP relay settings globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series The syntax for the ip dhcp relay fwd path command is ip dhcp relay fwd path lt A B C D gt lt O P Q R gt The following table outlines the parameters for this command LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 117 ip dhcp relay fwd path parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the forwarding path to be configured lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the forwarding path to be configured The ip dhcp relay fwd path command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The DHCP relay feature is enabled by default and the default mode is BootP DHCP ip dhcp relay fwd path enable command The ip dhcp relay fwd path enable command enables the specific DHCP forwarding path globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series The syntax for the ip dhcp relay fwd path enable command is ip dhcp relay fwd path lt A B C D gt lt O P Q R gt enable The following table describes the parameters for this command ip dhcp relay fwd path enable parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt En
234. mand has no parameters Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 116 IP Routing Configuration and Management show ip dhcp relay counters command The show ip dhcp relay counters command displays the current DHCP relay counters configuration globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series This includes the number of requests and the number of replies The syntax for the show ip dhcp relay counters command is show ip dhcp relay counters The show ip dhcp relay counters command is executed in the User EXEC command mode ip dhcp relay clear counters The ip dhcp relay clear counters command clears the counters for an interface The syntax for this command is ip dhcp relay clear counters This command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode while editing a VLAN only This command has no parameters show ip dhcp relay fwd path command The show ip dhcp relay fwd path command displays the current DHCP relay forward path configuration globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series which includes the interface the server the state enabled or disabled and the mode The syntax for the show ip dhcp relay fwd path command is show ip dhcp relay fwd path The show ip dhcp relay fwd path command is executed in the User EXEC command mode ip dhcp relay fwd path com
235. mismatch e Hello Interval or Dead Interval mismatch To determine any mismatches in OSPF configuration use the show ip ospf ifstats mismatch command ExStart Exchange problems Even though routers can recognize each other and have moved beyond two way communications routers can become stuck in the ExStart Exchange state Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 190 IP Routing Configuration and Management A mismatch in maximum transmission unit MTU sizes between the routers usually causes this type of problem For example one router could be set for a high MTU size and the other router a smaller value Depending on the size of the link state database the router with the smaller value may not be able to process the larger packets and thus be stuck in this state To avoid this problem ensure that the MTU size value for both routers match This problem is usually encountered during interoperations in networks with other vendor devices Note The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series automatically checks for OSPF MTU mismatches In the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series the supported MTU size for OSPF is 1500 bytes by default Incoming OSPF database description DBD packets are dropped if their MTU size is greater than this value Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP configuration This se
236. mmand is as boundary router enable The as boundary router command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no as boundary router command The no as boundary router command is used to withdraw a router as an Autonomous System Boundary Router The syntax of the no as boundary router command is no as boundary router enable The no as boundary router command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default cost ethernet command The default cost ethernet command is used to define the default cost metric of an ethernet 10 Mbps port The syntax of the default cost ethernet command is default cost ethernet lt metric value gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 88 IP Routing Configuration and Management The lt metric_value gt parameter represents the cost value to assign to the port This value is an integer between 1 and 65535 The default cost ethernet command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default cost fast ethernet command The default cost fast ethernet command is used to define the default cost metric of a fast ethernet 100 Mbps port The syntax of the default cost fast ethernet command is default cost fast ethernet lt metric value gt The lt metric_value gt parameter represents the cost value to assign to the port This value is an integer betw
237. mmands used to configure and manage UDP broadcast forwarding on the switch ip forward protocol udp command The ip forward protocol udp command is used to configure and manage UDP broadcast forwarding on the switch The syntax of the ip forward protocol udp command is ip forward protocol udp lt forwarding port gt lt protocol name gt portfwdlist lt forward list gt lt udp port gt lt destination ip address gt name lt list name gt The following table outlines the parameters of this command ip forward protocol udp parameters lt forwarding_port gt The port on which the UDP protocol operates lt protocol_name gt The name of the UDP protocol to be forwarded lt forward_list gt A list of ports to which the UDP protocol will be forwarded lt udp_port gt The UDP port on which the forwarding originates lt destination_ip_addresd he destination IP address of the UDP forwarding lt list_name gt The name of the forwarding list being created The ip forward protocol udp command is executed in the Global Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 114 IP Routing Configuration and Management clear ip forward protocol udp counters command The clear ip forward protocol udp counters command clears the UDP broadcast counters on each interface TIP Stacking the
238. mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 80 IP Routing Configuration and Management default ip rip holddown command The default ip rip holddown command is used to restore the default RIP holddown setting for the interface The syntax of the default ip rip holddown command is default ip rip holddown The default ip rip holddown command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip in policy command The default ip rip in policy command is used to delete the in policy associated with this interface The syntax of the default ip rip in policy command is default ip rip in policy lt policy name gt The default ip rip in policy command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip listen command The default ip rip listen command is used to set the ip rip listen to the default value which is enabled The syntax of the default ip rip listen command is default ip rip listen enable The default ip rip listen command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip out policy command The default ip rip out policy command is used to delete the out policy associated with this interface The syntax of the default ip rip out policy command is default ip rip out policy lt policy name gt The default ip rip out policy command is executed in the
239. multicast querier router was heard MRouterExpiration Displays the multicast querier router aging timeout value Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 308 Configuring IGMP snooping using the Java Device Manager Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 309 Configuring IGMP using Web based management This chapter describes the methods and procedures for the configuration and management of IGMP Configuring IGMP using the Web based Management Interface The Web based Management Interface provides tools for the configuration and management of IGMP To configure IGMP using these tools use the following procedure Step Action 1 Open the IGMP Configuration window by choosing Applications gt IGMP gt IGMP Configuration from the menu IGMP Configuration screen Application gt IGMP gt IGMP Configuration IGMP Table Action VLAN Snooping Proxy Robust Value Query Time seconds Bl 1 Disabled Disabled 2 125 B 2 Disabled Disabled 2 125 2 Click the icon in the Action column beside the VLAN for the IGMP to be configured The IGMP VLAN Configuration window appears Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200
240. n ABR 5530 24TFD config router router id 1 1 1 2 5530 24TFD config router area 0 0 0 2 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 17 area 0 0 0 2 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 4 Configure area range Configure R1 to enclose the two networks 172 3 3 0 and 172 3 4 0 into an address range entry 172 3 0 0 in area 0 0 0 2 R1 will generate a single summary advertisement into the backbone for 172 3 0 0 with metric 100 5530 24TFD config router area 0 0 0 2 range 172 3 0 0 16 summary link advertise mode summarize advertise metric 100 End To display the created areas use the show ip ospf area command Usage of this command on the example configuration would yield the following output Area ID 0 0 0 0 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 2 Reachable Area Border Routers 0 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 0 Link State Advertisements Checksum 0 0x0 Area ID 0 0 0 2 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 2 Reachable Area Border Routers 1 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 0 Link State Advertisements Checksum 0 0x0 To display area ranges use the show ip ospf area range command Usage of this command on the example configuration would yield the following output Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 S
241. n down command is ip ospf advertise when down enable The ip ospf advertise when down command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 96 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip ospf area command The ip ospf area command is used to assign an interface to an OSPF area The syntax of the ip ospf area command is ip ospf area lt ip address gt The lt ip_ address gt parameter represents the unique ID of the area to which the interface connects An area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the OSPF area backbone and is created automatically by the switch The ip ospf area command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf authentication key command The ip ospf authentication key command is used to configure an interface authentication password The syntax of the ip ospf authentication key command is ip opsf authentication key lt password gt The lt password gt parameter is the password to be configured This password can be up to 8 characters in length The ip opsf authentication key command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf authentication type command The ip ospf authentication type command is used to configure the interface authentication type The syntax of the ip ospf authentication type command is ip osp
242. n the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip supply command The default ip rip supply command is used to set ip rip supply to the default value which is enabled The syntax of the default ip rip supply command is default ip rip supply enable The default ip rip supply command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 82 IP Routing Configuration and Management default ip rip timeout command The default ip rip timeout command is used to restore the default RIP timeout setting for the interface The syntax of the default ip rip timeout command is default ip rip timeout The default ip rip timeout command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip triggered command The default ip rip triggered command is used disabled triggered updates on this switch The syntax of the default ip rip triggered command is default ip rip triggered enable The default ip rip triggered command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Open Shortest Path First OSPF commands This section describes the CLI commands used to configure and manage the Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series The Open Shortest Path First OSPF Protocol is an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP that distributes ro
243. nd SMLT for VLAN access to E1 a Configure VLAN 2 on R2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 type port b Create an IP address for VLAN 2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 10 1 20 3 255 255 255 0 c Configure the access port for VLAN 2 on R2 and add VLAN 2 to the IST and SMLT groups 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 2 1 47 1 48 2 1 2 2 Note 1 47 and 1 48 are SMLT ports 2 1 and 2 2 are IST ports d Create SMLT on R2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config mlt 2 member 1 47 1 48 5530 24TFD config mlt 2 enable 5530 24TFD config interface mlt 2 5530 24TFD config if smlt 1 e Enable OSPF interface for VLAN 2 on R2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 200 IP Routing Configuration and Management 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 20 3 f Configure VRRP VIP address for VLAN 2 on R2 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router vrrp ena 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 1 enable 5530 24TFD config if ip vrrp 1 backup master enable Note Fast Advertisement
244. nd saves the results in an address resolution table for future use 5 The network station s ARP table displays the association of the known MAC addresses to IP addresses Note The default timeout value for ARP entries is 6 hours Static ARP entries can be created and individual ARP entries deleted Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 22 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Proxy Address Resolution Protocol Proxy ARP Proxy ARP allows a network station to respond to an ARP request from a locally attached host or end station for a remote destination It does so by sending an ARP response back to the local host with its own MAC address of the network station interface for the subnet on which the ARP request was received The reply is generated only if the switch has an active route to the destination network The figure below is an example of proxy ARP operation In this example host C with a 24 bit mask appears to be locally attached to host B with a 16 bit mask so host B sends an ARP request for host C However the 5500 Series switch is between the two hosts To enable communication between the two hosts the 5500 Series switch would respond to the ARP request with host C s IP address but with its own MAC address Proxy ARP Operation R1 172 31 1 254 16 0 EO 16 00 00 01 ARP reply 17
245. net Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 302 Field IP Routing Configuration and Management Description Port Type Specifies the port type Address port dropped Source VLAN DHCP configuration DHCP can also be configured for Layer 3 VLANs To configure DHCP for a Layer 3 VLAN follow this procedure Step Action 1 Open the VLANs screen by selecting VLAN gt VLANs from the JDM menu 2 Highlight the VLAN for which DHCP is to be configured 3 Click IP The IP VLAN screen opens Select the DHCP tab This tab is illustrated below DHCP tab fields 192 168 249 46 IP LAN 1 l x IP Address F The following table describes the DHCP tab fields IV Enable MinSec fo 0 65535 sec Mode none bootp dhcp both RIP OSPF Stats I AlwaysBroadcast Graph Apply Refresh Close Hetp DHCP tab fields Fields Description Specifies whether DHCP is enabled or Enable disabled Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Specifies the IP Source Guard enabled port number Specifies the IP address allowed to communicate with the TIP Up to 10 IP addresses are allowed on an IP Source Guard ena
246. ng false information in its OSPF link state advertisements Likewise the security prevents a misconfigured router from joining an OSPF domain Currently there are two security mechanisms supported simple password security and Message Digest 5 MD5 security Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 136 IP Routing Configuration and Management Simple password mechanism The simple password security mechanism transmits a text password in the OSPF headers Only routers that contain the same authentication ID in their OSPF headers can communicate with each other Note Nortel recommends not using this security mechanism because the password is stored in plain text and can be read from the configuration file or from the OSPF packet To configure this authentication type on an OSPF interface of VLAN 2 using the password test1234 use the following commands 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf authentication type simple 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf authentication key test1234 Message Digest 5 The Message Digest 5 MD5 mechanism provides 128 bit encrypted authentication based on the RFC 1321 standard MD5 authentication for OSPF security makes it very hard for a malicious user to compute or extrapolate the decrypting codes from the OSPF packets Basically each OSPF packet has a mess
247. ng gt OSPF menu There you can find General tab for Auto Vlink creation Virtual If tab and Virtual Neighbors tab Route policies Route policies are a Nortel proprietary improvement on existing routing schemes Using existing routing schemes packets are forwarded based on routes that have been learned by the router through routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF or through the introduction of static routes Route policies introduce the ability to forward packets based on rule sets created by the network administrator These rule sets or policies are then applied to the learned or static routes Route policies on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the Routing Information Protocol RIP and Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol When used in conjunction with these protocols route policies can be used to perform the following tasks that are not possible using traditional routing methods e Listen for routing updates from specific gateways e Listen for routing updates from specific networks e Assign a specific subnet mask to be included with a network in the routing table e Advertise routing updates from specific gateways e Advertise routing updates to specific networks e Assign a specific subnet mask to be included in the route summary packets Advertise routes learned by one protocol to another Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200
248. ng normal mlt 2 learning normal mlt 2 bpdu all ports mlt 2 loadbalance basic 1 STP Phase 2 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 1 spanning tree stp 2 add vlan 102 spanning tree stp 3 add vlan 103 spanning tree stp 2 enable spanning tree stp 3 enable interface FastEthernet ALL spanning tree port 24 26 learning normal spanning tree port 1 2 stp 2 learning normal spanning tree port 7 8 stp 3 learning normal spanning tree port 24 26 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree port 1 2 stp 2 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree port 7 8 stp 3 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 timeout 120 no spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 156 IP Routing Configuration and Management enable exit MLT Phase 2 mlt spanning tree 1 stp 3 learning normal mlt spanning tree 2 stp 2 learning normal I kkk L3 kkk I no ip directed broadcast enable ip routing interface vlan 102 ip address 10 1 1 21 255 255 255 252 2 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 103 ip address 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 252 3 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit ip arp timeout 360 ip dhcp relay ip blocking mode none I OSPF router ospf enable ro
249. nsert Area Aggregate dialog fields Field Description ArealD The unique identifier of the Area this address aggregate is found in LsdbType The type of address aggregate This field specifies the link state database type that this address aggregate applies to Options available are summaryLink and nssaExternalLink IpAddress The IP address of the network or subnetwork indicated by the aggregate range Mask The subnet mask that pertains to the network or subnetwork Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 253 Effect This field indicates the aggregates effect Subnets subsumed by aggregate ranges either trigger the advertisement of the indicated aggregate advertiseMatching value or result in the subnet not being advertised at all outside the area Options available are advertiseMatching doNotAdvertiseMatching and advertiseDoNotAggregate AdvertiseMetric The advertisement metric associated with this aggregate This is an integer value between 0 and 65535 5 Click Insert End Area Aggregate deletion To delete an OSPF area aggregate use the following procedure Deleting an OSPF area aggregate Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears Select OSPF The OSPF di
250. nterface The syntax of the ip ospf hello interval command is ip ospf hello interval lt interval gt The lt interval gt parameter is the amount of time in seconds between hello packets This is an integer value between 1 and 65535 The ip ospf hello interval command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf mtu ignore command The ip ospf mtu ignore command is used to instruct the interface to ignore the packet MTU size specified in Database Descriptors The syntax of the ip ospf mtu ignore command is ip ospf mtu ignore enable The ip ospf mtu ignore command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf network command The ip ospf network command is used to define the type of OSPF interface this interface is The syntax of the ip ospf network command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 98 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip ospf network broadcast passive The ip osp network command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip ospf primary md5 key command The ip ospf primary md5 key command is used to configure the primary MD5 key to use for authentication in instances where interface authentication uses an MD5 key The syntax of the ip ospf primary md5 key command is ip ospf primary md5 key lt key value gt The lt key_value
251. nusual situations e The protocol uses fixed metrics the hop number to compare alternative routes as opposed to real time parameters such as measured delay reliability or load e RIP does not support address less links Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol The Open Shortest Path First OSPF Protocol is an Interior Gateway Protocol IGP that distributes routing information between routers belonging to a single autonomous system AS Intended for use in large networks OSPF is a link state protocol which supports IP subnetting and the tagging of externally derived routing information Note The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series implementation of OSPF only supports broadcast and passive interfaces Point to point and NBMA interfaces are not supported Overview In an OSPF network each router maintains a ink state database that describes the topology of the autonomous system AS The database contains the ocal state for each router in the AS including the router s usable interfaces and reachable neighbors Each router periodically checks for changes in its local state and shares any changes detected by flooding ink state advertisements LSAs throughout the AS Routers synchronize their topological databases based on the sharing of information from LSAs From the topological database each router constructs a shortest path tree with itself as the root The shortest path tree gives the optimal route to each dest
252. oadcast packets are forwarded only to a unicast host address the unicast IP address of the server for example Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Bootstrap Protocol BootP DHCP BootP relay The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is an extension of the Bootstrap protocol BootP and provides host configuration information to workstations on a dynamic basis To lower administrative overhead network managers prefer to configure a small number of DHCP servers in a central location It is necessary for routers to support the BootP DHCP relay function so that hosts can access configuration information from servers several router hops away Differences between DHCP and BootP The following differences between DHCP and BootP are specified in RFC 2131 and include functions that BootP does not address e The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series supports the Bootstrap protocol BootP BootP enables the retrieval of an ASCII configuration file name and configuration server address e A properly configured BootP server enables the switch to automatically learn its assigned IP address subnet mask and the IP address of the default router default gateway e DHCP defines mechanisms through which clients can be assigned a network address for a finite lease allowing for reuse of IP addresses e DHCP provides the mechanism for clients to acquire all of the IP configuration parameters needed to operate DHCP uses the BootP me
253. ociated with this route map permit deny Specifies the action to be taken when this policy is selected for a specific route A value of permit indicates that the route will be used while deny indicates that the route will be ignored lt sequence_number he secondary index value assigned to individual policies inside a larger policy group enable Indicates whether the policy is enabled Disabled policies should not be used for routing Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 103 lt prefix_list gt Indicates a previously defined prefix list to be used with the command This parameter is used with various options in this command lt protocol_name gt The name of a protocol to be used Options are direct static rip ospf and any Multiple protocols can be specified by using a comma separated list lt route_type gt A route type to be used Options are any external external 1 external 2 internal and local lt new_map_name gt A new name to be assigned to a previously configured route map lt ip_address gt An IP address and subnet mask to be used lt metric_value gt Indicates the value of the metric to be used while sending an update for routes This is an integer value between 0 and 65535 lt metric_type gt Indicates the metric
254. of RIP response packets received by the interface that have been discarded RcvBadRoutes The number of RIP routes received by the interface that have been ignored SentUpdates The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface This does not include full updates sent containing new information End To graph these statistics select a row from the Stats tab and click the Graph button A new dialog will open with the statistics for the selected interface This dialog is illustrated below RIP Stats Graph dialog B e BG A Clear Counters Close Help Poll Interval 10s Oday 00h 00m 09s Select a graph type by clicking the appropriate graphing button VLAN RIP configuration The RIP tab of the IP VLAN screen is used to configure RIP parameters for the interface To configure VLAN RIP parameters use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select VLAN gt VLANs from the Device Manager menu The VLAN dialog opens with the Basic tab selected 2 On the Basic tab select an interface and click the IP button 3 The IP VLAN screen opens with the IP Address tab selected Select the RIP tab This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 228 IP Routing Configuration and Management IP VLAN screen R
255. of the complete content of the advertisement excluding the Age field This field is excluded so that the advertisement s age can be increased without updating the checksum The checksum used is the same as that used in ISO connectionless datagrams and is commonly referred to as the Fletcher checksum 3 Click Refresh to update the information End External Link State Database information The Ext Link State Database tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view external link state information To view OSPF external link states use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Ext Link State Database tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog Ext Link State Database tab 192 168 249 46 OSPF x General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces IF Metrics Neighbors l Area Aggregate Redistribu Link State Database e a Seje 0 row s 2 Using the fields provided view the external link state database These fields are described in the following table Ext Link State Database fields Field Description Type The type of link state advertisement Each link state type has a separate advertisement format Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 250 IP
256. og will open Select the Message Digest tab This tab is illustrated above 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Message Digest dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert Message Digest dialog 192 168 249 46 OSPF Insert Message D ig Xi i Index 1 2 Type o mas Key I Close Help y 55 4 Using the fields provided create the new digest entry These fields are described in the following table Insert Message Digest dialog fields Field Description IpAddress The IP address associated with the digest entry Index The index value of the digest entry This is an integer value between 1 and 255 Type The type of digest entry Only MD5 is supported Key The key value associated with the digest entry 5 Click Insert Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 258 IP Routing Configuration and Management End Message Digest deletion To delete an OSPF message digest entry use the following procedure Deleting an OSPF message digest entry Step Action 1 a Ff W N From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears Select OSPF The OSPF dialog opens Select the Message Digest tab The Message Digest window opens Select an IpAddress to delete Click Delete End Virtual If Message D
257. oie RIPy2 ERS2 ERS1 a ETN 1 7 n 10 1 1 0 30 ea __ p Las RiPy2 oe 10 1 30 0 24 3 RIP v2 VLAN 3 802 10 brouter port Tagged trunk Legend E Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Ve Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Layer 2 Mode VLAN2 VLANS Use the following procedure to configure ERS2 to add RIP version 2 to VLAN 2 VLAN 3 and the brouter port Step Action 1 Configure RIP version 2 on VLAN 2 Enable RIP version 2 mode on the IP address used for VLAN 2 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router rip enable 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip rip send version rip2 5530 24TFD config if ip rip receive version rip2 2 Configure RIP version 2 on VLAN 3 Enable RIP version 2 mode on the IP address used for VLAN 3 5530 24TFD enable 5530 24TFD config terminal 5530 24TFD config router rip enable 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config if ip rip send version rip2 5530 24TFD config router rip enable 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 3 5530 24TFD config if ip rip receive version rip2 3 Configure RIP version 2 on the brouter port Enable RIP version 2 mode on the IP address used for the brouter port 5530 24TFD config interface FastEthernet 2 7 5530 24TFD config if ip rip enable 5530 24TFD config if ip rip send version rip2 LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Rout
258. omatically based on the value selected in the Poll Interval field To clear the counters and start over at zero click Clear Counters End VLAN OSPF statistics OSPF statistical information can also be viewed on a per interface basis To view VLAN OSPF statistics perform the following procedure Step Action 1 Select VLAN gt VLANs from the Device Manager menu The VLAN dialog opens 2 Select an interface from those listed on the Basic tab 3 Click the IP button 4 On the IP VLAN dialog select the OSPF Stats tab This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 263 OSPF Stats tab xl IP Address DHCP RIP 5 AbsoluteValue Cumulative Lastval sec 0 0 0 0 YersionMismatches 4reaMismatches AuthTypeMismatches AuthFailures NetMaskMismatches HelloIntervalMismatches DeadIntervalMismatches OptionMismatches RxHellos RxDBDescrs gs oo colo oo 90 CO oO oO oO O10 4 A ba k at at o o ojojololololojojolololojojojojo 090 9 9 090 09 9 90 9 9 09 090 9 090 090 09 0 ololololololololololololololololo olololololololololololololololololo ojojo 25T jal Clear Counters chose Help
259. ommand is no ip dhcp relay broadcast The no ip dhcp relay broadcast command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode IP routing configuration examples This section provides configuration examples for common IP routing tasks using the Command Line Interface CLI For conceptual information about the IP routing topics covered in this section refer to An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols page 13 Note In many of the following configuration examples a brouter port is used to create a connection to the network core This practice does not imply that a brouter port is the only means through which a core connection can be established The use of a brouter port is only one of many ways to create such a connection Address Resolution Protocol ARP configuration The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series provides the following Address Resolution Protocol ARP features e Default ARP aging e Static ARP entries e Proxy ARP Static ARP entries can be used to solve the following instances encountered on many networks e To communicate with a device that does not respond to an ARP request e To prevent an existing ARP entry from aging out When a static ARP entry is configured both the IP address and MAC address of a device is assigned to a physical port This includes the VLAN number if the physical port is associated with a VLAN Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protoco
260. ommands To change the interface DHCP relay configurations switch to the Interface Configuration command mode Interface DHCP relay commands Command Description show vlan dhcp relay shows vlan dhcp relay state ip dhcp relay min sec 30 sets min sec to 30 ip dhcp relay mode dhcp sets mode to dhcp no ip dhcp relay disables ip dhcp relay ip dhcp relay broadcast enables broadcast for this interface DHCP Relay forward path configurations These configurations are made per interface IP address and server IP address DHCP relay forward path commands page 43 DHCP relay forward path commands table describes the ip dhcp relay fwd path commands DHCP relay forward path commands Command Description show ip dhcp relay fwd path Shows ip dhcp relay fwd path ip dhcp relay fwd path Creates interface IP and server IP path with lt agent IP gt lt server IP gt modes DHCP amp BootP mode bootp dhcp ip dhcp relay fwd path Disables the interface server pair enable lt agent IP gt lt server IP gt false disable no dhcp relay fwd path Deletes the interface server pair lt agent IP gt lt server IP gt no ip dhcp relay Disables ip dhcp relay ip dhcp relay broadcast Enables broadcast for this interface Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 44 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols
261. on IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 247 Creating an OSPF host Step Action 1 From the Device main menu select OSPF The OSPF window opens 2 Select the Hosts tab The Hosts window opens 3 Click Insert The OSPF Insert Hosts dialog opens 4 Enter the information on the Insert Hosts dialog OSPF Insert 0 24 IpAddress Metric 0 65535 Field Description S O osts dialog xj IpAddress Specifies the host IP address Specifies the configured cost of the host 5 Click Insert End OSPF Host deletion To delete an OSPF host use the following procedure Deleting an OSPF host Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select OSPF 2 Select Hosts 3 Select the IpAddress to delete 4 Click Delete End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 248 IP Routing Configuration and Management Link State Database information The Link State Database tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view link state information To view OSPF link states use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Link State Database tab This tab is illustrated
262. onfiguration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 251 OSPF dialog Area Aggregate tab 192 168 249 46 OSPF xj Neighbors Link State Database Ext Link State Database General Areas Stub Area Metrics Interfaces 1f Metrics Area Aggregate Redistribute Message Digest Stats resin edb ype tpadeese mask effect advertzeeti Feri brea ee S coe e Orow s 2 Using the fields provided configure the area aggregate information These fields are described in the following table Area Aggregate tab fields Field Description ArealD The unique identifier of the Area this address aggregate is found in LsdbType The type of address aggregate This field specifies the link state database type that this address aggregate applies to Select one of the following types Summary Link Aggregated Summary Link nssaExternal link or Not so Stubby Area Link IpAddress The IP address of the network or subnetwork indicated by the aggregate range Mask The subnet mask that pertains to the network or subnetwork Effect This field indicates the aggregates effect Subnets subsumed by aggregate ranges either trigger the advertisement of the indicated aggregate advertiseMatching value or result in the subnet not being advertised at all outside the area Select one
263. onfigure route policies on the switch perform the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog will open with the Prefix List tab selected Select the Route Policy tab This tab is illustrated below Policy dialog Route Policy tab x Prefix List pplying Policy OSPF Accept RIP In Out Policy E SequenceNumber Name Enable Mode MatchProtocol MatchNetwork MatchIpRouteSource 2i 15 tof Ha ea 0 row s 2 Using the fields provided configure the route policy These fields are described in the following tab Route Policy tab fields Field Description Id The index value used to uniquely identify a group of policies SequenceNumber The secondary index value assigned to individual policies inside a larger policy group Name The name associated with this policy Enable Indicates whether the policy is enabled Disabled policies should not be used for routing Mode Specifies the action to be taken when this policy is selected for a specific route A value of permit indicates that the route will be used while deny indicates that the route will be ignored MatchProtocol Select the appropriate protocol RIP Static Direct OSPF or Any If configured matches the protocol through which the route is learned This field is used only for RIP announce purposes MatchNetwork If configured the switch matches the destination network
264. online e contact information for Nortel Technical Support e information about the Nortel Technical Solutions Centers e information about the Express Routing Code ERC for your product An ERC is available for many Nortel products and services When an ERC is used the call is routed to technical support personnel who specialize in supporting the service or product The ERC for a particular product or service is available online The main Nortel support portal is available at http www nortel com support Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 13 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols This chapter provides an introduction to IP routing and IP routing protocols used in the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Subsequent chapters will provide a more detailed description of switch capabilities and configuration procedures IP routing To configure IP routing on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series use virtual local area networks VLAN to create virtual router interfaces by assigning an IP address to the VLAN This section discusses this concept in depth For a more detailed description about VLANs and their use consult Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Release 5 1 Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and Link Aggregation IP addressing An IP version 4 IPv4 address con
265. orarily in a garbage list and continues to advertise them with a metric of 16 for a holddown period so that neighbors know that the routes are unreachable If a valid update for a garbage route is received within the holddown period the router adds the route back into its routing table If no update is received the router completely deletes all garbage list entries for the nonupdating router To prevent routing loops and to promote fast convergence RIP uses the mechanisms of split horizon with or without poisoned reverse and triggered updates Simple split horizon means that IP routes learned from a neighbor are not advertised back in updates to that neighbor Split horizon with poisoned reverse means that these routes are advertised back to the neighbor but they are poisoned with a metric of 16 which represents infinite hops in the network The receiver neighbor therefore ignores this route Triggered updates means that a router is required to send update messages whenever it changes the metric for a route even if it is not yet time for a regular update message RIP sends routing information updates every 30 seconds These updates contain information about known networks and the distances hop count associated with each For RIP version 1 no mask information is exchanged the natural mask is always applied by the router receiving the update Mask information is always included for RIP version 2 If information about a network is n
266. ors On point to point and broadcast networks the router dynamically detects its neighbors by sending hello packets to the multicast address AllSPFRouters On non broadcast multiaccess networks some configuration information is required in order to discover neighbors On all multiaccess networks broadcast or non broadcast the Hello Protocol also elects a DR for the network The router attempts to form adjacencies with some of its neighbors On multiaccess networks the DR determines which routers become adjacent This behavior does not occur if a router is configured as a passive interface because passive interfaces do not form adjacencies Adjacent neighbors synchronize their topological databases The router periodically advertises its link state and also does so when its local state changes LSAs include information about adjacencies enabling quick detection of dead routers on the network LSAs are flooded throughout the area ensuring that all routers in an area have exactly the same topological database Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 29 8 From this database each router calculates a shortest path tree with itself as root This shortest path tree in turn yields a routing table for the protocol OSPF router types Routers in an OSPF network can take on different roles dep
267. ot received for within the allotted timeout period 180 seconds by default it is removed from the routing table and the route is moved to the garbage list From the garbage list it will be advertised for the allotted holdown period 120 seconds by default with metric set to infinity 16 These timers can be changed by configuring the RIP Interface Timeout Timer and Holddown Timer parameters RIP supports the following standard behavior periodic RIP updates about effective best routes garbage collection e split horizon with or without poisoned reverse e triggered update for changed RIP routes e unicast to the specific query requestor e broadcast multicast of regular and triggered updates Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 25 e subnet mask RIP version 2 e routing table update based on the received RIP message e global update timer holddown timer and timeout timer per device and per interface e cost per device and per interface The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series implementation of RIP also supports the following features e in and out routing policies e auto aggregation also known as auto summarization of groups of adjacent routes into single entries Many RIP features are configurable The actual behavior of the protocol depends on the feature configurations
268. outer distributes all OSPF routes to the RIP network and all RIP routes to the OSPF network Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 148 IP Routing Configuration and Management ASBR disiribution example Area 0 1 1 1 3 am fal 10 1 1 080 2 yi 41 10 1 1 400 27 ASBR 172 2 2 0 2 i eras AX OSPF network RIPv2 network Legend es Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 za H Any router Use the following procedure to replicate the ASBR distribution example Step Action 1 Configure RIP Configure the RIP interface on R1 by configuring port 1 31 as a brouter port in VLAN 100 and enabling RIP on this interface 5530 24TFD config interface fast 1 31 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 1 31 vlan 100 subnet 10 1 1 41 30 5530 24TFD config router rip 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 41 2 Configure the RIP interface for RIP version 2 mode only 5530 24TFD config router rip enable 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 100 5530 24TFD config if ip rip receive version rip2 send version rip2 3 Configure the OSPF interface Configure port 2 7 as a brouter port in VLAN 200 and enable OSPF on this interface 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 7 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 7 vlan 200 subnet 10 1 1 2 30 5530 24TFD config if router ospf 55
269. outing Switch 5500 Series forwards DHCP requests to subnet 2 or to the host address of the DHCP server depending on the configuration DHCP operation DHCP End server station fs AN Subnet 1 _VLAN 1 r A 11238EA Forwarding DHCP packets In the example shown in Forwarding DHCP packets page 40 the agent address is 10 10 1 254 To configure the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series to forward DHCP packets from the end station to the server use 10 10 2 1 as the server address Forwarding DHCP packets 10 10 1 254 16 10 10 2 254 16 DHCP server n 10 10 2 1 16 End station _ lt thernet Routing Switel 10 10 1 1 16 i 5500 Series Sih Zs P net 1 en Subne maeri pee H e EE E zi ee a a DHCP server 10 10 3 1 16 Cea 4B ee 11239BA All BootP broadcast packets including DHCP packets that appear on the VLAN 1 router interface 10 10 1 254 will be forwarded to the DHCP server In this case the DHCP packets are forwarded as unicast to the DHCP server s IP address Multiple BootP DHCP servers Most enterprise networks use multiple BootP DHCP servers for fault tolerance The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series allows switch configuration to forward BootP DHCP requests to multiple servers Up to 10 servers can be configured to receive copies of the forwarded BootP DHCP messages Nortel Ethernet Routing Switc
270. p blocking mode none I OSPF router ospf enable router ospf router id 1 1 1 5 no as boundary router enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 172 IP Routing Configuration and Management no trap enable timers basic holddown 10 rfc1583 compatibility enable default cost ethernet 100 default cost fast ethernet 10 default cost gig ethernet 1 default cost ten gig ethernet 1 area 0 0 0 0 import external area 0 0 0 0 import summaries enable area 0 0 0 2 import noexternal default cost 1 area 0 0 0 2 import summaries enable exit enable configure terminal interface vlan 100 ip ospf area 0 0 0 2 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 0 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf transmit delay 1 ip ospf retransmit interval 5 ip ospf hello interval 10 ip ospf dead interval 40 ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 1000 ip ospf area 0 0 0 2 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 1 ip ospf area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable no ip ospf enable
271. p rip out policy allow End The configuration steps described in the above example distributes all OSPF routes to RIP However there are times when it can be more advantageous to distribute only a default route to RIP The following configuration steps describe how to distribute only a default route to RIP instead of all OSPF routes to RIP To configure R1 to distribute a default route only to RIP complete the following steps Step Action 1 Configure an IP prefix list with a default route The following command creates an IP prefix list named default with an IP address of 0 0 0 0 5530 24TFD config ip prefix list default 0 0 0 0 0 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 150 IP Routing Configuration and Management 2 Configure a route policy Create a route policy named Policy_Default which distributes the IP prefix list created in step 1 Note that ospf is selected as the match protocol value This causes the default route to be advertised through RIP only if OSPF is operational 5530 24TFD config route map Policy Default permit 1 enable match protocol ospf set injectlist default 5530 24TFD config route map Policy Default 1 set metric type typel 3 Apply the route policy to the RIP Out Policy Apply the route policy created in step 2 to RIP interface 10 1 1 41 5530 24TFD conf
272. path at hardware index 1 in the ECMP table will be used Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 205 In the configuration example illustrated below the following command would enable two OSPF ECMP paths on router R1 5530 24TFD config ospf maximum path 2 ECMP configuration example Ri R2 R4 V2 10 1 40 0 24 V3 10 1 30 0 24 Legend a fa Nea Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Use the following commands to enable ECMP on each of the supported protocols OSPF ospf maximum path lt path_ count gt e RIP rip maximum path lt path_count gt e Static Routes maximum path lt path_ count gt In all commands above the lt path_count gt parameter represents the number of ECMP paths allotted This is a value between 1 and 4 The default is 1 Displaying the IP routing table After ECMP configuration is complete verify the ECMP paths in the routing table using the show ip route command The following example displays the output for this command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 206 IP Routing Configuration and Management 0 100 111 1 1 3 4 5 10 10 10 1 10 100 111 0 x 10 100 111 200 Total Routes
273. proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 100 snooping disable vlan igmp 100 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 101 snooping disable vlan igmp 101 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 102 snooping disable vlan igmp 102 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan mgmt 1 MLT Phase 1 no mlt mlt 1 name Trunk 1 enable member 7 8 learning normal mlt 1 learning normal mlt 1 bpdu all ports mlt 1 loadbalance basic mlt 2 name Trunk 2 enable member 1 2 learning normal mlt 2 learning normal mlt 2 bpdu all ports mlt 2 loadbalance basic mlt 5 name Trunk 5 enable member 5 6 learning normal mlt 5 learning normal mlt 5 bpdu all ports mlt 5 loadbalance basic STP Phase 2 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 1 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 100 spanning tree stp 2 add vlan 101 spanning tree stp 2 add vlan 102 spanning tree stp 2 enable interface FastEthernet ALL spanning tree port 1 26 learning normal spanning tree port 1 2 7 8 stp 2 learning normal spanning tree port 1 26 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree port 1 2 7 8 stp 2 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 timeout 120 no spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 enable exit MLT Phase 2 mlt spanning tree 1 stp 1 learning normal Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 Au
274. rap enable The no trap command is executed in the Router Configuration mode area virtual link command Use the area virtual link command to create a virtual interface The syntax for the area virtual 1link command is area virtual link lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt authentication key lt WORD gt authentication type none simple message digest primary md5 key lt 1 255 gt dead interval lt 0 2147483647 gt hello interval lt 1 65535 gt retransmit interval lt 0 3600 gt transit delay lt 0 3600 gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 93 area virtual link parameters Parameter lt A B C D gt lt A B C D 0 32 gt Description Specifies the transit area ID expressed as an IP address Specifies the neighbor router ID expressed as an IP address authentication key lt WORD gt authentication type primary md5 key dead interval hello interval retransmit interval transit delay Specifies the unique identifier assigned to the authentication key Specifies one of the following authentication types e none simple password message digest MD5 TIP Up to 2 MD5 keys are allowed for message digest The default authentication type is none Specifies the user selected key used to encrypt OSPF protocol pac
275. ration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 178 IP Routing Configuration and Management Interface Nbr Router ID Nbr IP Address Pri State RetransQLen Perm 10 1 1 9 1 1 1 4 10 1 1 10 1 Full 0 Dyn 10 1 1 17 1 1 1 5 10 1 1 18 0 Full 0 Dyn 10 1 1 22 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 21 100 Full 0 Dyn Total OSPF Neighbors 3 show ip route Ip Route DST MASK NEXT COST VLAN PORT PROT TYPE PRF 172 3 3 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 18 20 100 T 5 O IB 20 172 2 2 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 10 10 101 T 1 O IB 120 172 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 10 30 101 T 1 O IB 20 203 203 100 0 255 255 255 0 203 203 100 53 1 1 C DB 0 20 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 10 1 1 10 10 101 T 1 O IB 120 10 1 1 24 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 10 20 101 T 1 O IB 20 10 1 1 20 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 22 1102 C DB 0 10 1 1 16 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 17 1100 C DB 0 10 1 1 8 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 9 1101 C DB 0 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 252 10 1 1 10 30 101 T 1 O IB 20 Total Routes 10 TYPE Legend I Indirect Route B Best Route E Ecmp Route A Alternative Route N Not in HW D Direct Route U Unresolved Route Router R3 Status show vlan Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active IVL SVL Mgmt 1 VLAN 1 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL Yes Port Members 4 6 9 12 15 26 103 VLAN 103 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 7 8 104 VLAN 104 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 1 2 105 VLAN 105 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port M
276. re explained in the table below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 239 Neighbor tab fields Field Description The IP address this neighbor is using as an IP source address On addressless links this will not be represented as 0 0 0 0 but as the address of another of the neighbor s interfaces AddressLessIndex The corresponding value of the interface index on addressless links This value is zero for interfaces having an IP address Router The unique ID of the neighboring router in the Autonomous System Options A value corresponding to the neighbor s Options field Priority The priority of the neighbor in the designated router election algorithm A value of 0 indicates that the neighbor is not eligible to become the designated router on this particular network This is a value between 0 and 255 The state of the relationship with this neighbor Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred RetransmissionQueueLength The current length of the retransmission queue NomaNbrPermanence The status of the entry The values dynamic and permanent refer to how the neighbor came to be known HelloSuppressed This field indicates whether Hello packets are being suppressed to the neig
277. re these parameters use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Stub Area Metrics tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog Stub Area Metrics tab 2 192167 140 44 05Pt xl Link Slate Dalabese Ext Liik Slats Dalabese Arca Auyreyde Redistibule MessayeDyest Vrtual If Messaye Diges Stats Cereral Arzas Stub Area Metrics Inter 2ces F Metrics Negnbors Virtua F Virzval Ncignbors Hosts areal TOS Metric Status majaa D il Sjef Using the fields provided configure the stub area metrics These fields are described in the table below Stub Area Metrics tab fields Field Description Areald The unique ID of the stub area TOS The Type of Service associated with the metric Metric The metric value applied to the indicated type of service By default this equals the least metric at the type of service among the interfaces to other areas Status Displays the status of the entry Active or Not Active This field is read only Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 235 3 Click Apply End Interface configuration The Interfaces tab of the OSPF dialog is used to configure OSPF interfaces To con
278. reating a Brouter port To create a new brouter port use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select a port on the Device Manager Front Panel view Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 287 2 Select Edit gt Port from the Device Manager menu The Port dialog opens with the Interface tab selected Select the IP Address tab This tab is illustrated above 3 Click Insert 4 The Insert IP Address dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert IP Address dialog 192 168 249 46 Port 1 1 Insert IP Addressin s IpAddress i NetMask ti wt Wend 1 4094 Macoffset 1 256 Close Help 5 Using the provided fields create the new brouter port These fields are outlined in the following table Insert IP Address dialog fields Description IpAddress The IP address assigned to this brouter NetMask The subnet mask associated with the brouter IP address The VLAN ID associated with this brouter port The MAC address offset associated with this brouter port Vlanld MacOffset 6 Click Insert End Note Brouter ports are treated as routable VLANs and are displayed on the Basic tab of the VLANs screen Deleting a Brouter port To delete a brouter port use the following proc
279. riginated Link State Advertisements 5 New Link State Advertisements Received 34 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled show ip ospf area Area ID 0 0 0 0 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 1 Reachable Area Border Routers 0 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 0 Link State Advertisements Checksum 0 0x0 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 3 Reachable Area Border Routers 2 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 1 Link State Advertisements 13 Link State Advertisements Checksum 409758 0x6409e show ip ospf interface Interface 10 1 1 10 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 10 1 1 9 Backup Designated Router 10 1 1 10 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 10 1 1 26 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 185 Designated Router 10 1 1 25 Backup Designated Router 10 1 1 26 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 203
280. ring the router configuration mode is a good way to verify that the mode has been activated 5530 24TFD config router ospf Note The remainder of this procedure refers to VLAN 35 Although VLAN 35 is used for this example any port type VLAN could be used Create a port type VLAN as VLAN number 35 in spanning tree protocol group 1 5530 24TFD config vlan create 35 type port 1 Log into the Interface Configuration mode for VLAN 35 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 35 Enable IP routing on VLAN 35 5530 24TFD config if ip routing Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing initial configuration 53 9 Assign an IP address to VLAN 35 5530 24TFD config if ip address 1 1 2 25 255 255 255 0 10 Enable OSPF in VLAN 35 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf en 11 Return to Global Configuration mode 5530 24TFD config if exit 12 By default all ports belong to a newly created VLAN This command removes all of the ports from VLAN 35 5530 24TFD config vlan members remove 35 all 13 Add ports 1 through 10 to VLAN 35 5530 24TFD config vlan members add 35 1 10 End Basic ASBR configuration The Autonomous System Boundary Router ASBR is used in OSPF to import routes that come from non OSPF sources such as e Local interfaces that are not part of OSPF RIP interfaces
281. rks 210 IP Routing Configuration and Management 3 Globals tab fields Field Description Forwarding Indicates whether the switch is forwarding datagrams received by it but not addressed to it Generally IP routers forward datagrams but IP hosts do not except those source routed through the host DefaultTTL Default value inserted into the Time To Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol Default value is 64 ReasmTimeout Maximum number of seconds that received fragments are held while they await reassembly at this entity Default value is 60 ARPLifeTime The lifetime in minutes of an ARP entry within the system Click Apply End Addresses tab The Addresses tab displays IP information for the switch To view the information on this tab follow this procedure Step 1 Action Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the Addresses tab This tab is illustrated below Addresses tab x Guba Addeoszez Sule Dad Rue ARP APP I terle ARF repetiit Lah ARP bepeciurparl TEP TEF Conectio s JO Ls cres EaP Dies Beakddh omd Rear ManSice Vai MocOtlset Secret yll MAK BU 32 167 120 F 182 127 20 9 252 255 295 9 one ij ake Wah Hd DUAL 255 6 0 0 lone 65235 z z abe B CS a Het Prevesti Tr
282. rnal Link State Checksum 49786 0xc27a Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 9 New Link State Advertisements Received 39 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled show ip ospf area Area ID 0 0 0 0 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 1 Reachable Area Border Routers 0 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 0 Link State Advertisements Checksum 0 0x0 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 4 Reachable Area Border Routers 2 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 1 Link State Advertisements 13 Link State Advertisements Checksum 448840 0x6d948 show ip ospf Interface 10 1 1 2 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Priority 1 Designated Router 10 1 1 1 Backup Designated Router 10 1 1 2 Authentication Type None MTU Ignore Yes Advertise When Down No Metric Value 10 Interface 10 1 1 25 Area ID 0 0 0 3 Admin State Enabled Type Broadcast Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 182 IP Routing Configuration and Management Interface 10 1 1 2 10 1 1 25 Total OSPF Priority 1 Designated Router 10 1 1 26 Backup Design
283. route command is host route lt A B C D gt metric lt 0 65535 gt where lt A B C D gt is the host IP address and metric is an integer between 0 and 65535 representing the configured cost of the host The host route command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no host route command Use the no host route command to delete a host from a router The syntax for the no host route command is no host route lt A B C D gt where lt A B C D gt is the host IP address The no host route command is executed in the Router Configuration mode network command The network command is used to enable OSPF routing on an interface and assign an OSPF interface to an area The syntax of the network command is network lt ip address gt area lt ip address gt The following table describes the parameters of this command network parameters Field Description The IP address of interface to be enabled for OSPF routing The area assigned to the interface The network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no network command The no network command is used to disable OSPF routing on an interface The syntax of the no network command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 90 IP Routing Configuration and Management a no network lt ip address gt The lt ip_address g
284. routing configuration examples 161 spanning tree stp 3 create spanning tree cost calc mode dotld spanning tree port mode normal spanning tree stp 1 priority 8000 spanning tree stp 1 hello time 2 spanning tree stp 1 max age 20 spanning tree stp 1 forward time 15 Spanning tree stp 1 tagged bpdu disable tagged bpdu vid 4001 spanning tree stp 1 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 spanning tree stp 3 priority 8000 spanning tree stp 3 hello time 2 spanning tree stp 3 max age 20 spanning tree stp 3 forward time 15 spanning tree stp 3 tagged bpdu enable tagged bpdu vid 4003 spanning tree stp 3 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 I VLAN vlan configcontrol automatic auto pvid vlan name 1 VLAN 1 vlan create 103 name VLAN 103 type port vlan create 104 name VLAN 104 type port vlan create 105 name VLAN 105 type port vlan create 1001 name VLAN 1001 type port vlan ports 1 2 tagging tagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan ports 3 6 tagging unTagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan ports 7 8 tagging tagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan ports 9 26 tagging unTagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan members 1 4 6 9 12 15 26 vlan members 103 7 8 vlan members 104 1 2 vlan members 105 13 14 vlan members 1001 10 vlan ports
285. roxy announce command The ip rip proxy announce command is used to enable proxy announcements on this RIP interface When proxy announcements are enabled the source of a route and its next hop are treated as the same when processing received updates So instead of the advertising router being used as the source the next hop is The syntax of the ip rip proxy announce command is ip rip proxy announce enable Proxy announcements are disabled by default The ip rip proxy announce command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip proxy announce command The no ip rip proxy announce command is used to disable proxy announcements on this RIP interface The syntax of the no ip rip proxy announce command is no ip rip proxy announce enable The no ip rip proxy announce command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip receive command The ip rip receive command is used to set the RIP version received on this interface The syntax of the ip rip receive command is ip rip receive version lt rip version gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 75 The lt rip version gt parameter indicates the RIP version The valid values for this parameter are e ripi e riplorrip2 e rip2 The ip rip receive command is executed in the Interf
286. s Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 21 Step Action 1 Enable IP routing globally 2 Assign an IP address to the specific VLAN or brouter port 3 Enable IP routing on the interface End Refer to subsequent chapters in this document for detailed instructions on configuring IP routes Address Resolution Protocol ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARP Network stations using the IP protocol need both a physical address and an IP address to transmit a packet If a network station knows only a network host s IP address the Address Resolution Protocol ARP enables the network station to determine a network host s physical address and bind the 32 bit IP address to a 48 bit MAC address A network station can use ARP across a single network only and the network hardware must support physical broadcasts If a network station wants to send a packet to a host but knows only the host s IP address the network station uses ARP to determine the host s physical address as follows 1 The network station broadcasts a special packet called an ARP request that asks the host at the specified IP address to respond with its physical address 2 All network hosts receive the broadcast message Only the specified host responds with its hardware address The network station then maps the host s IP address to its physical address a
287. s Port Members 24 26 100 VLAN 100 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 5 6 1000 VLAN 1000 Port None 0x0000 Yes IVL No Port Members 10 show vlan ip Id ifIndex Address Mask MacAddress Offset Routing 1 10001 203 203 100 51 255 255 255 0 00 15 9B F8 1C 40 1 Enabled 100 10100 10 1 1 18 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F8 1C 41 2 Enabled 1000 11000 172 3 3 1 255 255 255 252 00 15 9B F8 1C 42 3 Enabled show ip ospf Router ID 1 1 1 5 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status False AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 0 External Link State Checksum 0 0x0 Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 48 New Link State Advertisements Received 387 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled show ip ospf area Area ID 0 0 0 0 Import Summaries Yes Import Type External Intra Area SPF Runs 3 Reachable Area Border Routers 0 Reachable Autonomous System Border Routers 0 Link State Advertisements 0 Link State Advertisements Checksum 0 0x0 Area ID 0 0 0 2 Import Summaries Yes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 187 LL ee Import Type No External Intra Area SPF Runs 11
288. s expressed as an integer between 0 and 2147483647 TIP The retransmit dead interval should be a multiple of the hello interval and must be the same for all routers attached to a common network AuthType Specifies the interface authentication type The available authentication types are none simplePassword or MD5 AuthKey Specifies the interface authentication key used with the simplePassword authentication type PrimaryMd5Key Specifies the MD5 primary key If no MD5 primary key exists the value in this field is 0 Specifies the current DR state of the interface States are designated router DR backup designated router BDR or OtherDR Events Specifies the number of times the virtual interface has changed state or the number of times an error has occurred Specifies whether the virtual interface is broadcast or passive 4 Click one of the labelled buttons across the bottom of the tab to refresh the information in the view insert or delete information apply changes copy or paste settings reset changes export information to an external file or print End Virtual interface creation To create an OSPF virtual interface use the following procedure Creating an OSPF virtual interface Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing 2 Select OSPF The OSPF window opens with the General tab open 3 Select the Virtual If tab The Virtual If window opens Nortel Ethernet Routin
289. s of the specified prefix list This field applies only to non local routes MatchInterface If configured the switch matches the IP address of the interface by which the RIP route was learned against the contents of the specified prefix list This field is used only for RIP routes and ignored for all other type of route MatchRouteType Sets a specific route type to be matched applies only to OSPF routes Externaltype1 and Externaltype2 specify the OSPF routes of the specified type only OSPF internal refers to intra and inter area routes MatchMetric If configured the switch matches the metric of the incoming advertisement or existing route against the specified value 1 to 655535 If 0 then this field is ignored The default is 0 NssaPbit Set or reset the P bit in specified type 7 LSA By default the P bit is always set in case the user set it to a disable state for a particular route policy than all type 7 LSAs associated with that route policy will have the P bit cleared with this intact NSSA ABR will not perform translation of these LSAs to type 5 Default is enabled SetRoutePreference Setting the preference greater than zero specifies the route preference value to be assigned to the routes which matches this policy This applies to Accept policies only You can set a value from 0 to 255 The default value is 0 If the default is configured the global preference value is used Nortel Ethernet Routing Sw
290. signated router BDR is elected in addition to the designated router DR and in the event of failure of the DR will assume its role quickly An OSPF router with hosts directly attached to its interfaces can use host routes to advertise the attached hosts to its neighbors You can configure up to 32 host routes Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 27 August 2007 30 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Host routes are managed with Nortel Networks Command Line Interface NNCLI commands and SNMP MIBs and are identified by the host IP address and the configured route type of service TOS For each host directly connected to the router configure the cost of the link to the host during host creation You cannot modify this cost Note Always set TOS to 0 because TOS based routing is not supported When a host is added to or deleted from a host route the router updates the router LSAs and floods them to neighbors in each area where that router has an interface Following is an example of parameters for a host route advertised in the LSA Host route in LSA e Type 3 stub network e LinkID IP address of host directly connected to router e Link Data OxFFFFFFFF e Metric configured cost of host OSPF Enhancements e Host route Allows a router to advertise to its neighbors all hosts that are directly attached
291. sists of 32 bits expressed in a dotted decimal format XXX XXX XXX XXX The IPv4 address space is divided into classes with classes A B and C reserved for unicast addresses and accounting for 87 5 percent of the 32 bit IP address space Class D is reserved for multicast addressing IP address classifications page 13 lists the breakdown of the IP address space by address range and mask IP address classifications Number of Nodes per Networks Network A 1 0 0 0 127 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 127 16 777 214 Note Although technically part of Class A addressing network 127 is reserved for loopback 128 0 0 0 B 191 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 16 384 65 534 192 0 0 0 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Class Address Range Mask Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 14 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Number of Networks Nodes per Network Address Range 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 254 Note Class D addresses are primarily reserved for multicast operations although the addresses 224 0 0 5 and 224 0 0 6 are used by OSPF and 224 0 0 9 is used by RIP 240 0 0 0 240 255 255 255 Note Class E addresses are reserved for research purposes To express an IP address in dotted decimal notation each octet of the IP address is converted to a decimal number and separated by decimal
292. sly configured switch policy with this interface for use as an in policy OutPolicy Associates a previously configured switch policy with this interface for use as an out policy Cost The cost associated with this interface HoldDownTime Sets the holddown timer for this interface This is an integer value in seconds between 0 and 360 Timeoutinterval Sets the timeout interval for this interface This is an integer value between 15 and 259200 ProxyAnnounceFlag Enables or disables proxy announcements on this interface 3 Click Apply End RIP Statistics The Stats tab provides statistical information about the currently configured RIP interfaces To view these RIP statistics follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt RIP from the Device Manager menu The RIP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected 2 Select the Stats tab This tab is illustrated below Stats tab x Globals Interface Interface Advance 2 row s 3 RIP statistics for the configured interfaces are displayed The fields on this tab are outlined in the following table Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 227 Stats tab fields Field Description Address The RIP interface address RcevBadPackets The number
293. spanning tree stp 1 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 spanning tree stp priority 8000 spanning tree stp hello time 2 spanning tree stp max age 20 spanning tree stp forward time 15 Spanning tree stp 2 tagged bpdu enable tagged bpdu vid 4002 spanning tree stp 2 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 I VLAN vlan configcontrol autopvid auto pvid vlan name 1 VLAN 1 vlan create 100 name VLAN 100 type port vlan create 101 name VLAN 101 type port vlan create 102 name VLAN 102 type port vlan ports 1 2 tagging tagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan ports 3 6 tagging unTagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan ports 7 8 tagging tagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan ports 9 26 tagging unTagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan members 1 1 26 vlan members 100 5 6 vlan members 101 7 8 2 2 2 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 158 IP Routing Configuration and Management vlan members 102 1 2 vlan ports 1 2 pvid 102 vlan ports 3 4 pvid 1 vlan ports 5 6 pvid 100 vlan ports 7 8 pvid 101 vlan ports 9 26 pvid 1 vlan igmp unknown mcast no flood disable vlan igmp 1 snooping disable vlan igmp 1
294. spf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable no ip ospf enable exit l RIP router rip router rip enable timers basic holddown 120 timers basic timeout 180 update 30 default metric 8 no network 10 1 1 2 no network 10 1 1 25 network 20 1 1 1 no network 172 1 1 1 no network 203 203 100 52 exit enable configure terminal interface vlan 103 no ip rip advertise when down enable no ip rip auto aggregation enable no ip rip default listen enable no ip rip default supply enable ip rip cost 1 ip rip holddown 120 ip rip listen enable no ip rip poison enable no ip rip proxy announce enable ip rip receive version riplOrRip2 ip rip send version rip1lComp Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 166 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip rip timeout 180 no ip rip triggered enable ip rip supply enable exit interface vlan 104 no ip rip advertise when down enable no ip rip auto aggregation enable no ip rip default listen enable no ip rip default supply enable ip rip cost 1 ip rip holddown 120 ip rip listen enable no ip rip poison enable no ip rip proxy announce enable ip rip receive version riplOrRip2 ip rip send version riplComp ip rip timeout 180 no ip rip triggered enable ip rip supply enable e
295. ss documents on the Technical Support web site e If itis not already selected click the Browse product support tab From the list provided in the product family box select Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch e From the product list select the desired 5500 Series Switch e From the content list select Documentation e Click Go You can view documents online download them for future reference or printed them All documents available on the Technical Support web site are in Adobe Portable Document Format PDF format Finding the latest updates on the Nortel web site The content of this documentation was current at the time of release To check for updates to the documentation and software for the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series use the links provided in the following table Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Software Documentation Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Documentation page 10 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 12 Preface How to get help If a service contract for the Nortel product has been purchased from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If a Nortel service program was purchased contact Nortel Technical Support The following information is available
296. ssage format defined in RFC 951 The remainder of the options field consists of a list of tagged parameters that are called options RFC 2131 Summary of DHCP relay operation BootP DHCP clients workstations generally use UDP IP broadcasts to determine their IP addresses and configuration information If such a host is on a network or a subnet segment or VLAN that does not include a DHCP server the UDP broadcasts are by default not forwarded to the server located on a different network segment or VLAN The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can be configured to resolve this issue by forwarding the broadcasts to the server The router interfaces can be configured to forward DHCP broadcasts to other locally connected network segments or directly to the server s IP address DHCP must be enabled on a per VLAN basis Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 40 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols DHCP operation page 40 Figure DHCP operation shows an end station connected to subnet 1 corresponding to VLAN 1 The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series connects two subnets by means of the virtual routing function When the end station generates a DHCP request as a limited UDP broadcast to the IP address of all 1s that is 255 255 255 255 with the DHCP relay function configured the Nortel Ethernet R
297. st filtering switch ieeress eso ANN of ct Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 48 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can automatically set up IP Multicast filters so the IP Multicast traffic is only directed to the participating end nodes see In 5500 Series switch filtering IP multicast streams 1 of 2 page 48 switches S1 to S4 represent a LAN connected to an IP Multicast router The router periodically sends Host Membership Queries to the LAN and listens for a response from end stations All of the clients connected to switches S1 to S4 are aware of the queries from the router One client connected to S2 responds with a host membership report Switch S2 intercepts the report from that port and generates a proxy report to its upstream neighbor S1 Also two clients connected to S4 respond with host membership reports causing S4 to intercept the reports and to generate a consolidated proxy report to its upstream neighbor S1 5500 Series switch filtering IP multicast streams 1 of 2 Consolidated report B Ethemet Routing Switch 500 Series Switch S1 treats the consolidated proxy reports from S2 and S4 as if they
298. st command The default ip rip cost command is used to restore the default RIP costing settings for the interface The syntax of the default ip rip cost command is default ip rip cost out policy lt policy name gt poison enable proxy announce enable receive lt rip_version gt send lt rip version gt supply enable timeout triggered enable The default ip rip cost command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip default listen command The default ip rip default listen command is used to restore the default RIP route listening setting for the interface disabled The syntax of the default ip rip default listen command is default ip rip default listen enable The default ip rip default listen command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip default supply command The default ip rip default supply command is used to restore the default RIP route advertisement setting for the interface disabled The syntax of the default ip rip default supply command is default ip rip default supply enable The default ip rip default supply command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip enable command The default ip rip enable command is used to globally disable RIP on the interface The syntax of the default ip rip enable command is default ip rip enable The default ip rip enable command is executed in the Interface Configuration
299. st of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Nortel Networks software license agreement This Software License Agreement License Agreement is between you the end user Customer and Nortel Networks Corporation and its subsidiaries and affiliates Nortel Networks PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY YOU MUST ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS IN ORDER TO DOWNLOAD AND OR USE THE SOFTWARE USE OF THE SOFTWARE CONSTITUTES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the Software unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price Software is owned or licensed by Nortel Networks its parent or one of its subsidiaries or affiliates and is copyrighted and licensed not sold Software consists of machine readable instructions its components data audio visual content such as images text recordings or pictures and related licensed materials including all whole or partial copies Nortel Networks grants you a license to use the Software only in the country where you acquired the Software You obtain no rights other than those granted to you under th
300. st tab 192 168 249 46 Policy xj Prefix List Route Policy Applying Policy OSPF Accept RIP InfOut Policy 1d Prefix PrefixmaskLen Name MaskLenFram MaskLenUpto Apply Refresh elete Dea BS chose Help 0 row s 2 Using the fields provided configure the selected Prefix List These fields are described in the following table Prefix List tab fields Field Prefix PrefixMaskLen Description The unique identifier of this prefix list The IP address associated with this prefix list The subnet mask length associated with this prefix list The name associated with this prefix list MaskLenFrom The mask length from the stated subnet mask MaskLenUpto The mask length up to the stated subnet mask 3 Click Apply End Prefix List creation To create a new prefix list follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected This tab is illustrated above 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Prefix List dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 266 IP Routing Configuration and Management Insert Prefix List dialog 192 168 249 46 Policy Insert Prefi Listed
301. st tab of the OSPF dialog is used to view OSPF message digest settings To view OSPF message digests use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dialog will open Select the Message Digest tab This tab is illustrated below OSPF dialog Message Digest tab xi Neighbors Link State Database Ext Link State Database Area Aggregate Redistribute Refresh Insert Delete B BI cece Her Max 2 keys are allowed for each IpAddress interface Orow s 2 Using the fields provided view the message digest information These fields are described in the following table Message Digest tab fields Field Description IpAddress The IP address associated with the digest entry Index The index value of the digest entry This is an integer value between 1 and 255 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 257 The type of digest entry Only MD5 is supported The key value associated with the digest entry 3 Click Refresh to update the displayed information End Message Digest creation To create anew OSPF message digest entry follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt OSPF from the Device Manager menu The OSPF dial
302. statistics All parameters for this command are optional Not specifying an address of an area will display statistics for the backbone area Displays the authentication type and key for each OSPF interface Displays the configured timers for each OSPF interface Displays the link state database for the selected parameter Displays information about the router s OSPF neighbors Displays information about OSPF redistribution policies Displays OSPF statistics TIP To clear OSPF statistics counters execute the clear ip ospf counters command Displays configured OSPF timers Displays interface MD5 authentication keys Displays general OSPF interface information Displays OSPF virtual link information Displays OSPF transit delay retransmit interval hello interval and retransmit dead interval information for the virtual interface Displays virtual interface MD5 authentication keys Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 101 Command Description show ip ospf virtual neighbors Displays general information about virtual neighbors show ip ospf host route Displays the host IP address and cost for a host route clear ip ospf counters command The clear ip osp counters command clears OSPF statistics counters including mismatc
303. strated below RIP dialog Interface tab xi Interface Advance Receive 192 168 249 46 jripiCompatible frip1OrRip2 1 a 9 I Bl 1 row s 2 Using the fields provided configure the interface The following table describes these fields Interface tab fields Field Description Address The IP address of the RIP interface This field is for organizational purposes only and cannot be edited Send Sets the RIP version sent on this interface The following values are valid e doNotSend No RIP updates sent on this interface e ripVersion1 RIP updates compliant with RFC 1058 e rip1Compatible Broadcasts RIPv2 updates using RFC 1058 route subsumption rules e ripVersion2 Multicasting RIPv2 updates The default is rip1 Compatible Receive Sets the RIP version received on this interface rip1 rip2 or rip1OrRip2 The default is rip1OrRip2 Note that rip2 and rip1OrRip2 imply reception of multicast packets Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 225 3 Click Apply End Advanced RIP interface configuration Advanced RIP interface configuration is used to fine tune and further configure a RIP interface To configure advanced RIP interface options follow this procedure Step Action
304. subnet mask to assign to the port The subnet mask portion is expressed as a value between 0 and 32 The brouter command is executed in the FastEthernet IEEE 802 3 Interface Configuration mode no brouter command The no brouter command is used to disable or remove a brouter from the switch The syntax of the no brouter command is no brouter port lt brouter port gt routing enable The lt brouter_ port gt parameter represents the brouter port to disable or remove from the switch The no brouter command is executed in the FastEthernet IEEE 802 3 Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 113 show brouter command The show brouter command is used to display information about the brouter configuration on the switch The syntax of the show brouter command is show brouter port lt brouter port gt Usage of the optional port lt brouter port gt port narrows the scope the command to the specified port Omission of this parameter displays all ports The show brouter command is executed in the User EXEC mode UDP broadcast forwarding commands UDP broadcast forwarding is a general mechanism for selectively forwarding limited UDP broadcasts received on an IP interface to a configured IP address This section outlines the CLI co
305. t 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 141 OSPF stub area example 21 1 1 1 5 10 1 1 20 30 Ri 2 1 22 massor 1 Rigg eneo 17 RR Su aen a 1 20 2 6 2 6 VLAN 2 ree Stub Area 2 Area 0 Legend E Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 Note AS external LSAs are not flooded into a stub area Instead only one default route to external destinations is distributed into the stub area by the stub ABR router The area default cost specifies the cost for advertising the default route into stub area by the ABR Use the procedure outlined below to perform the stub area configuration illustrated above Note This example assumes that global IP routing has been enabled on the switch Global IP routing is enabled on the switch in Global Configuration mode using the ip routing command Step Action 1 Configure router R1 a Configure the OSPF interface on R1 Configure port 2 6 as a brouter port in VLAN 100 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 6 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 6 vlan 100 subnet 10 1 1 18 30 b Configure VLAN 2 on R Create VLAN 2 and assign an IP address to it 5530 24TFD config vlan create 2 type port 5530 24TFD config vlan mem add 2 1 20 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 2 5530 24TFD config if ip address 172 3 3 1 255 255 255 0 c Enable OSPF on R1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 Augus
306. t default cost 0 16777215 import external noexternal nssa import summaries enable range subnet mask nssa entlink summary link Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 86 IP Routing Configuration and Management advertise mode no summarize summarize suppress advertise metric 0 65535 The following table outlines the parameters for this command area parameters Parameter Description ip_address Specifies the Area ID expressed as IP address A B C D default cost The default cost associated with an OSPF stub area 0 16777215 import external The area s support for importing Autonomous System noexternal nssa external link state advertisements import summaries Controls the import of summary link state advertisements enable into stub areas This setting has no effect on other areas range subnet_mask Used to specify range parameters for the OSPF area nssa entlink summary link advertise mode no summarize summarize suppress advertise metric 0 65535 The area command is executed in the Router Configuration mode Note The configuration of a totally stubby area no summary advertising is a two step process First define an area with the import flag set to noexternal Second disable import summaries in the same area with t
307. t it to a disable state for a particular route policy than all type 7 LSAs associated with that route policy will have the P bit cleared with this intact NSSA ABR will not perform translation of these LSAs to type 5 Default is enabled SetRoutePreference Setting the preference greater than zero specifies the route preference value to be assigned to the routes which matches this policy This applies to Accept policies only You can set a value from 0 to 255 The default value is 0 If the default is configured the global preference value is used SetMetric If configured the switch sets the metric value for the route while announcing or redistributing The default import metric is 0 If the default is configured the original cost of the route is advertised into OSPF for RIP the original cost of the route or the default value is used Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 269 SetMetricType Applicable to OSPF protocol only If configured sets the metric type for the routes to be announced into the OSPF routing protocol that matches this policy The default is type 2 This field is applicable only for OSPF announce policies SetinjectNetList If configured the switch replaces the destination network of the route that matches this policy with
308. t parameter represents the IP address of the interface to be disabled The no network command is executed in the Router Configuration mode redistribute command The redistribute command is used to configure OSPF route redistribution Direct RIP and static route redistribution is currently supported The syntax of the redistribute command is redistribute lt route type gt enable metric lt metric value gt metric type lt metric type gt route policy lt policy name gt subnets lt subnet setting gt The parameters for this command are listed below redistribute parameters Parameters Description lt route_type gt The type of route to be configured Valid options are direct rip and static lt metric_value gt The metric value to associate with the route redistribution This is an integer value between 0 and 65535 lt metric_type gt The metric type to associate with the route redistribution Valid options are type1 and type2 lt policy_name gt The route policy to associate with route redistribution This is the name of an existing route policy lt subnet_setting gt The subnet advertisement setting of this route redistribution This determines whether individual subnets are advertised Valid options are allow and suppress The redistribute command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no redistribute command The no redistribute command is used to disable an OSPF route policy or OSP
309. t 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 142 IP Routing Configuration and Management Configure R1 in stub area 2 with the Router ID 1 1 1 5 Add the OSPF interfaces to area 2 and enable OSPF on these interfaces 5530 24TFD config router router id 1 1 1 5 5530 24TFD config router area 0 0 0 2 import noexternal 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 18 area 0 0 0 2 5530 24TFD config router network 172 3 3 1 area 0 0 0 2 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable 2 Configure router R2 a Configure the OSPF interface on R2 Configure port 2 6 as a brouter port in VLAN 100 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 6 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 6 vlan 100 subnet 10 1 1 17 30 b Configure the second OSPF interface on R2 Configure port 2 1 as a brouter port in VLAN 300 Enable OSPF on this interface 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 1 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 1 vlan 300 subnet 10 1 1 22 30 5530 24TFD config if ip ospf enable c Enable OSPF on R2 Configure R2 in stub area 2 with an area default cost of 10 Disable import summary to prevent R2 from sending summary LSAs of area 0 into area 2 R2 will originate only summary LSA for default route into area 2 Note that by default OSPF interface 10 1 1 22 is placed into OSPF area 0 0 0 0 Because one additional area of 0 0 0 2 is added and OSPF interface 10 1 1 17 is added to area 0 0 0 2 R2 automatically becomes a stub ABR 5530 24T
310. t vr_id gt critical ip enable The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The ip vrrp critical ip command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip vrrp critical ip command The no ip vrrp critical ip command is used to disable the VRRP critical IP functionality The syntax of the no ip vrrp critical ip command is no ip vrrp lt vr_id gt critical ip enable The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 108 IP Routing Configuration and Management ee The no ip vrrp critical ip command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp critical ip addr command The ip vrrp critical ip addr command is used to set the IP address used with the VRRP critical IP functionality The syntax of the ip vrrp critical ip addr command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt critical ip addr lt ip address gt The lt vr_id gt parameter represents the virtual router being configured The lt ip address gt parameter represents the IP address to be used The ip vrrp critical ip addr command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip vrrp enable command The ip vrrp enable command is used to enable the virtual router The syntax of the ip vrrp enable command is ip vrrp lt vr_id gt enable
311. table outlines the parameters for this command ip dhcp relay parameters Parameter Description min sec lt 0 65535 gt Enter the minimum number of seconds to wait between receiving the DHCP packet and forwarding it to the destination device The default is 0 mode bootp dhcp Enter the type of DHCP packets this VLAN supports bootp_dhcp e bootp Supports BootP only e dhcp Supports DHCP only e bootp_dhcp Supports both BootP and DHCP The ip dhep relay command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode no ip dhcp relay command The no ip dhcp relay command disables DHCP relay on a VLAN The syntax for the no ip dhcep relay command is no ip dhcp relay The no ip dhcp relay command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode ip dhcp relay broadcast command The ip dhcp relay broadcast command enables DHCP relay broadcast on a VLAN The syntax for the ip dhcp relay broadcast command is Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 120 IP Routing Configuration and Management ip dhcp relay broadcast The ip dhcp relay broadcast command is executed in the Interface Configuration command mode no ip dhcp relay broadcast command The no ip dhcp relay broadcast command disables DHCP relay broadcast on a VLAN The syntax for the no ip dhcp relay broadcast c
312. tandard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 147 Area ID Range Subnet Mask Range Type Advertise Mode Metric 0 0 0 2 172 3 0 0 16 Summary Link Summarize 100 To display ABR status use the show ip ospf command Usage of this command on the example configuration would yield the following output Router ID 1 1 1 2 Admin Status Enabled Version Number 2 Area Border Router Oper Status True AS Boundary Router Config Status False External Link State Advertisements 2 External Link State Checksum 45698 0xb282 Type of Service TOS Routing Supported False Originated Link State Advertisements 5 New Link State Advertisements Received 34 OSPF Traps Disabled Auto Virtual Link Creation Disabled SPF Hold Down Time 10 RFC 1583 Compatibility Enabled Configuring Autonomous System Border Routers ASBR An ASBR is a router that has a connection to another Autonomous System to distribute any external routes that originated from a protocol into OSPF A Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series configured as an ASBR can Distribute all OSPF routes to RIP e Distribute RIP direct or static routes to OSPF Distributing OSPF routes to RIP and RIP to OSPF using AS external LSA Type 1 metrics The configuration example illustrated below displays a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series configured as an ASBR between an OSPF and RIP version 2 network In this example the r
313. te command is default timers basic update The default timers basic update command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default metric command The default metric command is used to set the default RIP metric value The syntax of the default metric command is default metric lt metric_ value gt The lt metric_value gt parameter is an integer value between 0 and 15 The default metric command is executed in the Router Configuration mode default ip rip advertise when down command The default ip rip advertise when down command is used to restore the default RIP advertise when down setting for the interface disabled The syntax of the default ip rip advertise when down command is default ip rip advertise when down enable The default ip rip advertise when down command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode default ip rip auto aggregation command The default ip rip auto aggregation command is used to restore the default RIP auto aggregation setting for the interface disabled The syntax of the default ip rip auto aggregation command is default ip rip auto aggregation enable The default ip rip auto aggregation command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 79 default ip rip co
314. ted in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip auto aggregation command The no ip rip auto aggregation command is used to disable auto aggregation on the RIP interface The syntax of the no ip rip auto aggregation command is no ip rip auto aggregation enable The no ip rip auto aggregation command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip cost command The ip rip cost command is used to set the administrative path cost of the interface The syntax of the ip rip cost command is ip rip cost lt path_ cost gt The lt path_cost gt parameter represents a value between 1 and 15 The default path cost is 1 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 71 The ip rip cost command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip default listen command The ip rip default listen command is used to enable the acceptance of default route advertisements The syntax of the ip rip default listen command is ip rip default listen enable The ip rip default listen command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode no ip rip default listen command The no ip rip default listen command is used to disable the acceptance of default route advertisements The syntax of the no ip rip default listen command is no ip rip default listen enab
315. ter id command is used to set the identifier to the user configured router ID which is expressed in the form of an IP address The syntax of the router id command is router id lt router id gt The lt router_id gt parameter is used as the unique identifier for the router The router id command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no router id command The no router id command is used to reset the router ID to 0 0 0 0 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 92 IP Routing Configuration and Management nT renner TT The syntax of the no router id command is no router id The no router id command is executed in the Router Configuration mode timers basic holddown command The timers basic holddown command is used to configure the OSPF holddown timer The syntax of the timers basic holddown command is timers basic holddown lt timer value gt The lt timer value gt parameter represents a second value between 3 and 60 seconds The command is executed in the Router Configuration mode trap command The trap command is used to enable OSPF system traps The syntax of the trap command is trap enable The trap command is executed in the Router Configuration mode no trap command The no trap command is used to disable OSPF system traps The syntax of the no trap command is no t
316. ter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the forwarding path to be enabled lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the forwarding path to be enabled The ip dhcp relay fwd path enable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The DHCP feature is enabled by default ip dhcp relay fwd path disable command The ip dhcp relay fwd path disable command disables the specific DHCP forwarding path globally on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series The syntax for the ip dhep relay fwd path disable command is ip dhcp relay fwd path lt A B C D gt lt O P Q R gt disable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 118 IP Routing Configuration and Management i The following table describes the parameters for this command ip dhcp relay fwd path disable parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of the DHCP agent on the forwarding path to be disabled lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the DHCP server on the forwarding path to be disabled The ip dhep relay fwd path disable command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode The DHCP relay feature is enabled by default no ip dhcp relay fwd path command The no ip dhcp relay fwd path command removes the specified DHCP forwarding path globally on the Nort
317. the non backbone areas Normal area A normal area is a collection of routers that use the same Area D that calculates inter area and external routes through the use of the following link state advertisements e Summary LSAs e ASBR summary LSAs e AS external LSAs As illustrated in the following figure a normal area supports Area Border Routers ABRs and Autonomous System Border Routers ASBRs OSPF normal area ASBR AS extemal LSAs LSA Type 5 from Area 1 LSA Type 5 from Area 0 Normal Area Summary LSAs 0 0 0 0 LSA Type 3 and 4 from Area 1 Summary LSAs Normal Area LSA Type 3 and 4 0 0 0 1 from Area 0 Legend E Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series automatically becomes an ABR when more than one area is configured for it and each area has at least one operational interface To designate a router as an ASBR use the as boundary router enable command 5530 24TFD config router as boundary router enable Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 140 IP Routing Configuration and Management Stub and Not So Stubby areas Stub areas do not receive advertisements for external routes AS external LSAs type 5 from an ABR which reduces the size of the link state database Instead routing to external destinations from wit
318. the Device Manager menu The VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected Select the Stats tab This tab is illustrated below VRRP dialog Stats tab x Globals Interface Address Interfaces E s RouterChecksumErrors RouterVersionErrors 0 RouterVrIdErrors 20m 0 8 A Clear Counters Chose He Poll Interval fics Oday 00h 00m 00s 2 Using the provided fields to view and graph the general VRRP statistics The following table outlines these fields Stats tab fields Field Description RouterChecksumErrors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value RouterVersionErrors The total number of VRRP packets received with an unknown or unsupported version number RouterVrlidErrors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRID for this virtual router End Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP The Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP feature allows routers to determine equal cost paths to the same destination prefix The multiple paths can be used for load sharing of traffic and allows faster convergence to other active paths in case of network failure This section describes the procedures used to configure ECMP on the switch using the Java Device Manager Note ECMP is only supported on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5520 and 5530 ECMP will work in a mixed stack but will not run on any Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5510 units in
319. the Forwardings tab into lists and assign name to the lists To configure a forwarding list use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager menu The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab selected Select the Forwarding Lists tab This tab is illustrated below UDP Forward dialog Forwarding Lists tab xi Protocols Forwardings Forwarding Lists Broadcast Interfaces 14 wae ai 1ITFTP 1 2 fee fase GB ome inserted 2 Using the provided fields configure the forwarding list These fields are outlined in the following table Forwarding Lists tab fields Id The unique identifier assigned to the forwarding list Name The name assigned to the forwarding list FwdldList The identifiers of the port server IP pairs created on the Forwardings tab and associated with the forwarding list 3 Click Apply End UDP forwarding list creation To create a new forwarding list use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager menu The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 292 IP Routing Configuration and Management selected Select the Forwarding Lists tab This tab is illustrated above
320. the stack Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 285 ECMP configuration The ECMP tab is used to configure and manage ECMP settings for RIP OSPF and static routes To configure ECMP use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt IP from the Device Manager menu The IP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected Select the ECMP tab This tab is illustrated below 192 167 120 9 IP ix Globals Addresses Routes Static Routes ARP ARP Inspection VLAN ARP Inspection port TCP TCP Connections UDP Listeners ECMP RoutingPratacol static rip spe Zort peres T IES a Ed ee ev 3 row s 2 Using the MaxPath field enter the number of paths allotted to each protocol listed Up to 4 paths can be allotted to each The default is 1 3 Click Apply End Brouter port A brouter port is a single port VLAN that can route IP packets as well as bridge all non routable traffic The following section describes the procedures necessary to configure and manage brouter ports on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series using the Java Device Manager Configuration and management of Brouter ports The IP Address tab of the Port dialog is used to configure and manage the switch
321. the statistical information select the desired data and click the appropriate graph button at the bottom of the screen Route policies Route policies are a Nortel proprietary improvement on existing routing schemes Using existing routing schemes packets are forwarded based on routes that have been learned by the router through routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF or through the introduction of static routes Route policies introduce the ability to forward packets based on rule sets created by the network administrator These rule sets or policies are then applied to the learned or static routes This section describes the configuration and management of route policies using the Java Device Manager Prefix List configuration The Prefix List tab is used for the configuration of policy prefix lists Prefix lists are the base item in a routing policy Prefix lists contain lists of IP addresses with their associated masks that support the comparison of ranges of masks To configure a prefix list following this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt Policy from the Device Manager menu The Policy dialog opens with the Prefix List tab selected This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 265 Policy dialog Prefix Li
322. thernet Routing Switch 5500 f The following procedure outlines the commands used to replicate the above configuration example Step Action 1 Configure the RIP interface Configure port 1 20 as a brouter port in VLAN 200 and enables RIP on this interface 5530 24TFD config interface fast 1 20 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 1 20 vlan 200 subnet 20 1 1 2 30 5530 24TFD config router rip 5530 24TFD config router network 20 1 1 2 2 Globally enable RIP and configure a RIP interface for RIP version 2 5530 24TFD config router rip enable 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 200 5530 24TFD config if ip rip receive version rip2 send version rip2 3 Configure the OSPF interface Configure port 2 6 as a brouter port 5530 24TFD config interface fast 2 6 5530 24TFD config if brouter port 2 6 vlan 100 subnet 10 1 1 18 30 4 Enable OSPF Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 152 IP Routing Configuration and Management Configure R1 as an ASBR assign the OSPF Router ID 1 1 1 5 create OSPF NSSA area 2 add the OSPF interface 10 1 1 18 to area 2 and enable OSPF on the interface Enable ASBR and OSPF globally 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router router id 1 1 1 5 5530 24TFD config router as boundary router enable 5530 24TFD config router area
323. this example the IGMP host provides an IP Multicast stream to designated routers that forward the IP Multicast stream on their local network only if there is a recipient The client server path is set up as follows 1 The designated router sends out a host membership query to the subnet and receives host membership reports from end stations on the subnet 2 The designated routers then set up a path between the IP Multicast stream source and the end stations 3 Periodically the router continues to query end stations about whether to continue participation 4 As long as any client continues to participate all clients including non participating end stations on that subnet receive the IP Multicast stream Note Although the non participating end stations can filter the IP Multicast traffic the IP Multicast traffic still exists on the subnet and consumes bandwidth IP Multicast can be optimized in a LAN by using IP Multicast filtering switches such as the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series As shown in IP multicast propagation with IGMP routing page 47 a non IP Multicast filtering switch causes IP Multicast traffic to be sent to all segments on the local subnet IP multicast propagation with IGMP routing Host membership fo ery Intemet Designated 3 LP router 1 A Designated router 2 Non IP Multicast filtering switch Multicast stream Host membership report Non IP Multica
324. thout a valid route The syntax for the show ip arp static command is show ip arp static The show ip arp static command can be executed in any command mode show ip arp static command output IP ARP IP Address Age min MAC Address VLAN Unit Port Trunk Flags 10 3 2 198 0 00 00 00 00 01 99 VLAN 1 1 1 S Total ARP entries 1 Flags Legend S Static D Dynamic L Local B Broadcast ip arp command The ip arp command creates and enables a static ARP entry The requested information for connection to the device must be supplied The syntax for the ip arp command is ip arp lt A B C D gt lt aa bb cc dd ee ff gt lt unit port gt vid lt 1 4094 gt The following table outlines the parameters for this command ip arp parameters Parameters Description lt A B C D gt Enter the IP address of the device being set as a static ARP entry lt aa bb cc dd ee ff gt Enter the MAC address of the device being set as a static ARP entry lt unit port gt Enter the unit and port number of the device being set as a static ARP entry vid lt 1 4094 gt Enter the VLAN ID to which the static ARP entry is being added to The ip arp command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 66 IP Routing Configuration and Management no ip arp
325. ticast Group Multicast Group The IP Multicast group addresses that Membership Table Address are currently active on the associated port Port The port numbers associated with the IP Multicast group addresses displayed in the IP Multicast Group Address field Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 5 1 Standard 27 August 2007 314 Index A Accessing technical assistance 12 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols 13 ARP 21 ARP commands 64 ARP configuration examples 120 auto router ID 44 automatic router ID assignment if router leaves stack 44 automatic virtual link delete 244 Avoiding duplicate IP addresses 44 B Brouter port 19 Brouter port commands 112 Brouter port screens 285 C Configuring IGMP using Web based management 309 Configuring IGMP with JDM 305 create an automatic virtual link 243 D default router ID auto assigned if router leaves stack 44 Default TTL field 210 delete automatic virtual link 244 DHCP commands 115 DHCP forward path commands DHCP screens 295 DHCP setup 41 DHCP BootP relay 39 Documentation updates 11 E ECMP 38 ECMP commands 110 ECMP configuration examples 204 ECMP screens 284 G Global DHCP commands H host routes 29 IGMP configuration pages 309 IGMP snooping 46 305 IGMP with the JDM 305 Interface DHCP commands IP addressin
326. ting Switch 5500 Series refer to the publications listed in Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Documentation page 10 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Documentation Title Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Release 5 1 Installation Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Release 5 1 Series Configuration System Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Release 5 1 Series Configuration Security Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Release 5 1 Configuration VLANs Spanning Tree and Link Aggregation Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Release 5 1 Configuration IP Routing Protocols Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Release 5 1 Configuration Quality of Service Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Release 5 1 Configuration System Monitoring Part Number NN47200 300 NN47200 500 NN47200 501 Description Instructions for the installation of a switch in the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series It also provides an overview of hardware key to the installation configuration and maintenance of the switch Instructions for the general configuration of switches in the 5500 Series that are not covered by the other documentation Instructions for the configuration and management of security for switches in the 5500 Series Instructions for the configuration of spanning and trunking protocols on 5500 Series switches NN47200 502 NN47200 5
327. tions such as the NetBIOS name service rely on User Datagram Protocol UDP broadcasts to request a service or locate a application If a host is on a network subnet segment or VLAN that includes a server for the service UDP broadcasts are by default not forwarded to the server located on a different network segment or VLAN This is resolved by forwarding the broadcasts to the server through physical or virtual interfaces UDP broadcast forwarding is a general mechanism for selectively forwarding limited UDP broadcasts received on an IP interface to a configured IP address The packet is sent as a unicast packet to the server The following are the basic steps for UDP broadcast forwarding configuration 1 Enter the UDP protocols to be forwarded 2 Create forwarding policies by defining UDP protocol and server pairs 3 Assemble these policies into lists 4 Apply these lists to the appropriate interfaces When a UDP broadcast is received on a router interface it must meet the following criteria if it is to be considered for forwarding e It must be a MAC level broadcast It must be an IP limited broadcast e It must be for a configured UDP protocol e It must have a TTL value of at least 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 39 For each ingress interface and protocol the UDP br
328. tlines the parameters for this command Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 61 ip route parameters Parameter Description lt A B C D gt Enter IP address of the destination point of the route being added lt W X Y Z gt Enter subnet mask address of the destination node for the route being added lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route being added lt 1 65535 gt Enter the weight or cost of the route being added The ip route command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode no ip route command The no ip route command removes a static route The syntax for the no ip route command is no ip route lt A B C D gt lt W X Y Z gt lt O P Q R gt The following table outlines the parameters for this command no ip route parameters Parameters Description lt A B C D gt Enter IP address of the destination point of the route being removed lt W X Y Z gt Enter subnet mask address of the destination node for the route being removed lt O P Q R gt Enter the IP address of the next hop of the route being removed The no ip route command is executed in the Global Configuration command mode ip route enable command The ip route enable command enables a static route The syntax for th
329. to that router s interfaces Up to 32 host routes can be configured e Virtual links The OSPF network can be partitioned into multiple areas However a backbone area must exist and be contiguous and every non backbone area must be connected to the backbone area using either a physical or a logical link In a network where a physical connection between the non backbone area and backbone area is impossible use of a virtual link provides the logical connection through another non backbone area called the transit area Virtual links can be created manually or automatically The 5500 Series switch supports up to 16 virtual links When 5500 Series switches are stacked and a unit leaves the stack and becomes standalone the router ID is automatically changed to its default value if IP blocking is turned off and OSPF is globally enabled This prevents duplication of a router ID in the OSPF routing domain The new router ID value is temporary that is it is not saved to NVRAM Therefore upon reset the old router ID is restored Configurable using NNCLI ACG and Device Manager Example configurations The following is an example for creating a host route Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing 31 Creating Host Route Example 1 R3 config router ospf R3 config router host route 11 11 11 111
330. tocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 230 IP Routing Configuration and Management Field Description ExternLsaCount ExternLsaCksumSum OriginateNewLsas The number of external link state type 5 link state advertisements in the link state database The sum of the link state checksums of the external link state advertisements contained in the link state database This sum can be used to determine if there has been a change in a router s link state database and to compare the link state database of two routers The number of new link state advertisements that have been originated This number is incremented each time the router originates a new link state advertisement RxNewLsas The number of link state advertisements received determined to be new instantiations This number does not include newer instantiations of self originated link state advertisements OMbpsPortDefaultMetric The default metric of a 10 Mbps port This is an integer value between 1 and 65535 100MbpsPortDefaultMetrig The default metric of a 100 Mbps port This is an integer value between 1 and 65535 1000MbpsPortDefaultMetricThe default metric of a 1000 Mbps port This is an integer value between 1 and 65535 1 10000MbpsPortDefaultMe lrithe default metric of a 10000 Mbps port This is an integer value between 1 and 65535 TrapEnable Indicates whether OSPF traps should be
331. tp 3 add vlan 104 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 105 spanning tree stp 1 add vlan 1001 spanning tree stp 3 enable interface FastEthernet ALL spanning tree port 4 6 9 12 26 learning normal spanning tree port 1 2 7 8 stp 3 learning normal Spanning tree port 4 6 9 12 26 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree port 1 2 7 8 stp 3 cost 1 priority 80 spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 timeout 120 no spanning tree bpdu filtering port 1 26 enable exit interface FastEthernet ALL spanning tree port 10 learning disable exit interface FastEthernet ALL exit 1 MLT Phase 2 mlt spanning tree 1 stp 3 learning normal mlt spanning tree 2 stp 3 learning normal Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 163 mlt spanning tree 4 stp 1 learning normal l kkk L3 kkk I no ip directed broadcast enable ip routing interface vlan 1 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 103 ip address 10 1 1 2 255 255 255 252 3 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 104 ip address 10 1 1 25 255 255 255 252 4 ip dhcp relay min sec 0 mode bootp dhcp no ip dhcp relay broadcast ip dhcp relay exit interface vlan 105 ip address 20 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 5 ip dhcp relay
332. tp forward time 15 spanning tree stp 3 tagged bpdu enable tagged bpdu vid 4003 spanning tree stp 3 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 I VLAN vlan configcontrol autopvid auto pvid LLL Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 WWWWNONNDNN N Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 155 vlan name 1 VLAN 1 vlan create 102 name VLAN 102 type port vlan create 103 name VLAN 103 type port vlan ports 1 24 tagging unTagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan ports 25 26 tagging tagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan members 1 24 26 vlan members 102 1 2 vlan members 103 7 8 vlan ports 1 2 pvid 102 vlan ports 3 6 pvid 1 vlan ports 7 8 pvid 103 vlan ports 9 26 pvid 1 vlan igmp unknown mcast no flood disable vlan igmp 1 snooping disable vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 102 snooping disable vlan igmp 102 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan igmp 103 snooping disable vlan igmp 103 proxy disable robust value 2 query interval 125 vlan mgmt 1 MLT Phase 1 no mlt mlt 1 name Trunk 1 enable member 7 8 learning normal mlt 1 learning normal mlt 1 bpdu all ports mlt 1 loadbalance basic mlt 2 name Trunk 2 enable member 1 2 learni
333. tream ports and to generate a consolidated proxy report for forwarding to its upstream neighbor Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN field The default setting is Disabled Robust Value Type the robust value in the appropriate format This feature lets you set the switch to offset expected packet loss on a subnet If packet losses on a subnet are unacceptably high the Robust Value field can be increased to a higher value Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN field The default setting is 2 Query Time Type the query time in seconds in the appropriate format This feature lets you control the number of IGMP messages allowed on the subnet by varying the query interval the interval between general queries sent by the multicast router Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN field The default setting is 125 seconds Static Router Ports Select the check boxes of the router ports to Version 1 and Version associate with the VLAN alternatively select 2 the check box to uncheck a selected router port Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 312 Configuring IGMP using Web based management Field Description Note This field affects only the VLAN specified in the page s VLAN fie
334. ts all of the hosts in that VLAN and IGMP group IGMP snooping configuration rules The IGMP snooping feature operates according to specific configuration rules When configuring the switch for IGMP snooping consider the following rules that determine how the configuration reacts in any network topology e There is a maximum of 240 groups on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series e A port that is configured for port mirroring cannot be configured as a static router port Ifa MultiLink Trunk member is configured as a static router port all of the MultiLink trunk members are configured as static router ports Also if a static router port is removed and it is a MultiLink Trunk member all MultiLink trunk members are removed as static router port members automatically e Static router ports must be port members of at least one VLAN e The IGMP snooping feature is not STP dependent e The IGMP snooping feature is not Rate Limiting dependent Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 50 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols e The snooping field must be enabled for the proxy field to have any valid meaning e Static router ports are configured per VLAN and per IGMP Version Note Because IGMP snooping is set up per VLAN all IGMP changes are implemented according to the VLAN configuration for
335. tton The Filter dialog is displayed This dialog is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 213 192 168 249 46 IP Routes Filter S xj Condition C AND C oR IV Ignore case contains does not contain equals to Column C does not equal to I All records Dest Ce Mask Sr I NextHop i 7 HopOrMetric o y O I Interface eo J Proto LO sss PathType E Pref LO SY Filter Close 2 Using the fields provided set the filter for the tab These fields are described in the following table Filter dialog fields Field Description Condition When using multiple filter expressions on the tab this is the condition that is used to join them together Ignore Case Denotes whether filters are case sensitive or insensitive Column Denotes the type of criteria that will be applied to values used for filtering All Records Select this check box to clear any filters and display all rows Dest Select this check box and enter a value to filter on the route destination value Mask Select this check box and enter a value to filter on the route destination subnet mask value NextHop Select this check box and enter a value to filter on the route next hop value HopOrMetric Select this check box and ent
336. tworks IP routing configuration examples 153 Configuring a multi area complex The multi area complex configuration example described in this section uses five Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series devices R1 to R5 in a multi area configuration Many of the concepts and topology descriptions that are used in this example configuration are described in the previous sections of this chapter The concepts shown in those examples are combined in this example configuration to show a real world topology example with command descriptions Multi area complex example 10 1 1 18 30 134 168 1 0 30 Area 0 10 1 1 17 30 a me R2 10 1 1 20 30 MLT 2 Router ID 1 4 1 4 172 1 1 0 24 172 2 2 0 24 RIPv2 Network For this configuration example the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series devices R1 through R5 are configured as follows e R1is an OSPF ABR that is associated with OSPF Area 0 and 3 e R2is an OSPF Stub ABR for OSPF Area 2 and ABR to OSPF Area 3 e R3is an OSPF ASBR and is configured to distribute OSPF to RIP and RIP to OSPF Legend anger es Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 154 IP Routing Configuration and Management e R4is an OSPF internal router in Area 3 e R5is an internal OSPF stub router in Area 2 All inter
337. type for routes to be imported into the OSPF routing protocol Options are type1 and type2 The route map command is executed in the Global Configuration mode ip rip in policy command The ip rip in policy command is used to specify a RIP Accept In policy for an interface This policy takes the form of a previously configured route map The syntax of the ip rip in policy command is ip rip in policy lt rmap_name gt The lt rmap_ name gt parameter represents the name of a previously configured route map The ip rip in policy command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode ip rip out policy command The ip rip out policy command is used to specify a RIP Announce Out policy for an interface This policy takes the form of a previously configured route map The syntax of the ip rip out policy command is ip rip out policy lt rmap name gt The lt rmap_ name gt parameter represents the name of a previously configured route map Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 104 IP Routing Configuration and Management The ip rip out policy command is executed in the Interface Configuration mode Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP commands The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP is designed to eliminate the single point of failure that can occur when the single static
338. ugust 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 277 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP The Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP is designed to eliminate the single point of failure that can occur when the single static default gateway router for an end station is lost This section describes the procedures used to configure VRRP using the Java Device Manager Global VRRP configuration The Device Manager can be used to configure global VRRP settings This is done from the VRRP Globals tab To configure global VRRP settings use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt VRRP from the Device Manager menu The VRRP dialog opens with the Globals tab selected This tab is illustrated below VRRP dialog Globals tab xi InterFace Address Interfaces Stats J Enabled Version 2 NotificationCnt ce enabled disabled JV PingVirtualAddrEnabled Apply Refresh Close Help 2 Using the provided fields configure the global VRRP settings These fields are illustrated in the following table Globals tab fields Field Description Enabled Indicates whether VRRP is globally enabled on the switch Version Indicates the version of VRRP supported on this switch Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007
339. uly The Addresses tab is a read only tab Click Refresh to immediately refresh the information it displays The fields on this tab are outlined in the following table Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 211 Addresses tab fields Field Description Iflndex The port number or VLAN ID IpAddress The device IP address NetMask The subnet mask address BcoastAddrFormat The IP broadcast address used ReasmMaxSize The size of the largest IP datagram that this entity can reassemble from incoming IP fragmented datagrams received on this interface Vianld The VLAN number A value of 1 indicates that the VLAN ID is ignored MacOffset Used to calculate the offset of the VLAN MAC from the switch MAC Secondarylf The Secondarylf field is set to True if the VLAN IP address is a secondary IP address and False if the IP address for the VLAN is the primary IP address End Routes tab The Routes tab lists the different routes dynamic or static known to the switch To view the known routes perform the following procedure Step Action 1 Open the IP screen by selecting IP Routing gt IP from the menu Select the Routes tab This tab is illustrated below IP dialog Routes tab Chbas aderans Soules ranr tia tea git
340. up master enabled virp priority 100 VLAN 3999 IST VLAN MLTID 1 IP 10 1 20 3 24 VRRP VIP 10 1 20 1 vrrp backup master enabled virp prionty 100 Legend as Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 Vez Ethemet Routing Switch 5500 Layer 2 Mode VLAN2 IST VLAN The following commands would recreate the above configuration 1 Configuration for R1 MLT CONFIGURATION config t mlt 1 member 2 1 2 2 mlt 1 enable vlan port 2 2 2 2 tagging enable interface mlt 1 ist enable peer ip 2 1 1 2 vlan 3999 interface fast Ethernet 1 48 smlt 1 VLAN CONFIGURATION config t vlan members remove 1 1 48 2 1 2 2 vlan create 2 type port vlan members remove 2 1 1 1 47 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 2 1 47 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 2 ip address 10 1 20 2 255 255 255 0 router ospf enable router ospf network 10 1 20 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 203 router vrrp ena interface vlan 2 ip vrrp address 1 10 1 20 1 ip vrrp 1 enable ip vrrp 1 backup master enable vlan create 3999 type port vlan members remove 3999 1 1 1 47 2 3 2 8 3 1 3 8 vlan members add 3999 2 1 2 2 interface vlan 3999 ip address 2 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 PORT CONFIGURATION PHASE II config t mlt spanning tree 1 stp all learning disable interface fast Ethern
341. upply enable exit 4 R4 configuration commands 1 STP Phase 1 spanning tree stp 3 create spanning tree cost calc mode dotld spanning tree port mode normal spanning tree stp 1 priority 8000 spanning tree stp 1 hello time 2 spanning tree stp 1 max age 20 spanning tree stp 1 forward time 15 Spanning tree stp 1 tagged bpdu disable tagged bpdu vid 4001 spanning tree stp 1 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 Spanning tree stp 3 priority 8000 Spanning tree stp 3 hello time 2 spanning tree stp 3 max age 20 spanning tree stp 3 forward time 15 Spanning tree stp 3 tagged bpdu enable tagged bpdu vid 4003 spanning tree stp 3 multicast address 01 80 c2 00 00 00 I VLAN vlan configcontrol automatic auto pvid vlan name 1 VLAN 1 vlan create 101 name VLAN 101 type port vlan create 104 name VLAN 104 type port vlan ports 1 26 tagging unTagAll filter untagged frame disable filter unregistered frames enable priority 0 vlan members 1 3 6 9 26 vlan members 101 7 8 vlan members 104 1 2 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 168 IP Routing Configuration and Management vlan ports 1 2 pvid 104 vlan ports 3 6 pvid 1 vlan ports 7 8 pvid 101 vlan ports 9 26 pvid 1 vlan igmp unknown mcast no flood disable vlan igmp 1 snooping disable vlan igmp 1 proxy disable robust value 2
342. ust 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 294 IP Routing Configuration and Management NumDropPktsDestUnreach The total number of UDP broadcast packets dropped because the destination was unreachable NumDropPktsUnknownPort The total number of UDP broadcast packets dropped because the destination port or protocol specified has no matching forwarding policy BroadCastMask The subnet mask of the local interface that is used for broadcasting the UDP broadcast packets 3 Click Apply End UDP broadcast interface creation To create a new broadcast interface use the following procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt UDP Forwarding from the Device Manager menu The UDP Forwarding dialog opens with the Protocols tab selected Select the Broadcast Interfaces tab This tab is illustrated above 2 Click Insert 3 The Insert Broadcast Interface dialog opens This dialog is illustrated below Insert Broadcast Interfaces dialog LocallfAddr i wt maam UdpPortFwdlistid 1 1000 Idtist Maxtth e 1 16 BroadCastMask ss Close Help 4 Using the provided fields create the new broadcast interface These fields are outlined in the following table Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 2
343. ute dialog fields Field Description RouteSource This field indicates that the protocol is either interested or not interested in knowing the routes learned from this source Enable Indicates whether the redistribution entry is active Metric A value between 0 and 65535 that indicates the metric to be announced in the advertisement Metric Type The field specifies the metric type The value type1 is treated as an internal metric and type2 is treated as an external metric Subnets This field indicates whether subnetworks need to be advertised individually Options available are allow and supress RoutePolicy The name of an existing switch policy that will be used to determine whether a specific route should be advertised to a given protocol 5 Click Insert End Redistribution deletion To delete a redistribution entry use the following procedure Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 256 IP Routing Configuration and Management Deleting a redistribution entry Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing The IP Routing menu appears Select OSPF The OSPF dialog opens Select the Redistribute tab The Redistribute window opens Select a RouteSource to delete a A WO N Click Delete End Message Digest information The Message Dige
344. ute direct metric 10 metric type type2 subnets allow redistribute direct enable redistribute rip metric 10 metric type type2 subnets allow redistribute rip enable exit enable configure terminal interface vlan 103 ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf transmit delay 1 ip ospf retransmit interval 5 ip ospf hello interval 10 ip ospf dead interval 40 ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 104 ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 105 ip ospf area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf network broadcast Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 165 I LL ee ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable no ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 1001 ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 1 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 1 ip ospf area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf network broadcast ip o
345. ute map rip pol 1 set metric 0 route map rip pol 1 set nssa pbit enable route map rip pol 1 set ip preference 0 l Brouter Port interface fastEthernet ALL brouter port 2 7 vlan 2090 subnet 10 1 1 1 30 ip rip in policy rip pol 1 brouter port 2 8 vlan 2091 subnet 10 1 1 5 30 ip rip in policy rip pol 1 Using RIP announce policies In the previous configuration example a RIP accept policy is used on ERS1 to insert a single route into its route table for all networks from ERS3 Instead of using an accept policy on ERS1 a RIP announce policy on ERS3 could be used to announce a single route to both ERS1 and ERS2 for the local network range To configure the RIP announce policy on ERS3 use the following configuration steps Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 133 Step Action 1 Configure the IP prefix list on ERS3 named Prefix_1 with the IP address 10 1 240 0 5530 24TFD config ip prefix list Prefix 1 10 1 240 0 20 ge 20 le 32 2 Configure the route policy named Policy_Rip with match criteria using the IP prefix configured in step 1 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 1 1 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 1 1 enable 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 1 permit 1 enable 5530 24TFD config route map rip pol 1 permit 1 set injectlist Prefix
346. uter Port interface fastEthernet ALL brouter port 2 7 vlan 3 subnet 10 1 1 1 30 The following commands can be used to confirm the configuration of RIP parameters show vlan This command is used to display information about the currently configured switch VLANs show vlan ip This command is used to display IP address information about VLANs that have been assigned addresses on the switch show ip rip This command displays information on the global switch RIP configuration show ip route This command displays the switch routing table show ip rip This command displays information about the RIP interfaces interface present on the switch Configuring RIP version 2 When RIP is enabled on an interface it operates by default in rip1compatible send mode and rip1lorRip2 receive mode Depending on configuration requirements the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series can be configured to operate using RIP version 1 or 2 The configuration illustrated below demonstrates a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series switch that has been configured to operate use RIP version 2 only Note This example builds on the previous RIP configuration Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 129 RIPv2 configuration example 10 1 20 0 24 VLAN 2 Nawonee
347. uter ospf router id 1 1 1 1 no as boundary router enable no trap enable timers basic holddown 10 rfc1583 compatibility enable default cost ethernet 100 default cost fast ethernet 10 default cost gig ethernet 1 default cost ten gig ethernet 1 area 0 0 0 3 import external area 0 0 0 3 import summaries enable exit enable configure terminal interface vlan 103 ip ospf area 0 0 0 3 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 100 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf transmit delay 1 ip ospf retransmit interval 5 ip ospf hello interval 10 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 157 ip ospf dead interval 40 ip ospf enable exit interface vlan 102 ip ospf area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf network broadcast ip ospf priority 100 ip ospf authentication type none ip ospf mtu ignore enable no ip ospf advertise when down enable ip ospf enable exit 2 R2 configuration commands 1 STP Phase 1 spanning tree stp 2 create spanning tree cost calc mode dotld spanning tree port mode normal spanning tree stp 1 priority 8000 spanning tree stp 1 hello time 2 spanning tree stp 1 max age 20 spanning tree stp 1 forward time 15 Spanning tree stp 1 tagged bpdu disable tagged bpdu vid 4001
348. uting information between routers belonging to a single autonomous system AS Intended for use in large networks OSPF is a link state protocol which supports IP subnetting and the tagging of externally derived routing information Note OSPF commands used during the configuration and management of VLANs in the Interface Configuration mode can be used to configure any VLAN regardless of the one used to log into the command mode Insert the keyword vian with the number of the VLAN to be configured after the command keywords ip ospf The current VLAN will remain at the one used to log into the Interface Configuration command mode after the command execution ip ospf apply accept command The ip ospf apply accept command is used to apply OSPF accept policies to the switch The syntax of the ip ospf apply accept command is ip ospf apply accept Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 83 The ip ospf apply accept command is executed in the Global Configuration mode ip ospf apply redistribute direct command The ip ospf apply redistribute direct command is used to apply only direct OSPF redistribution configuration to the switch The syntax ofthe ip ospf apply redistribute direct command is ip ospf apply redistribute direct The ip ospf apply redistribute direct comman
349. witch 5500 Series RIP is a distance vector protocol used to dynamically discover network routes based on information passed between routers in the network RIP is useful in network environments where using static route administration would be difficult Global RIP configuration Global RIP configuration is used to configure the RIP parameters that will apply to all active RIP interfaces To configure global parameters follow this procedure Step Action 1 Select IP Routing gt RIP from the Device Manager menu The RIP dialog is opened with the Globals tab selected This tab is illustrated below Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the Java Device Manager 223 RIP dialog Globals tab x Glob Interface Interface Advance Operation disable enable UpdateTime fo sec RouteChanges 0 Queries 0 HoldDownTime 120 0 360 sec TimeOutInterval 180 15 259200 sec DefImportMetric 8 0 15 Apply Refresh Close Hel 2 Using the fields provided configure the global RIP parameters The following table describes these parameters Globals tab fields Field Description Operation Enables or disables the operation of RIP on all interfaces The default is disabled UpdateTime The time interval between RIP updates on all interfaces It is a global p
350. word you must supply an authorization key AuthKey Specifies the interface authentication key used with the simplePassword authentication type 6 Click Insert End Virtual interface deletion To delete an OSPF virtual interface use the following procedure Deleting an OSPF virtual interface Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing Select OSPF The OSPF window opens 2 3 Select the Virtual If tab 4 Select an Areald to delete 5 Click Delete End Automatic Virtual Link creation Use the AutoVirtLinkEnable box on the OSPF General tab to create an automatic virtual link For more information about Virtual Link see OSPF virtual link page 31 Use the following procedure to create an automatic Virtual Link Creating an automatic Virtual Link Step Action 1 From the Device Manager main menu select IP Routing gt OSPF The OSPF dialog opens 2 On the General tab enter the router ID in the Routerld box for one of the end point ABRs Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks 244 IP Routing Configuration and Management 3 Check the AutoVirtLinkEnable box 4 Click Apply 5 Enter the router ID in the Routerld box for the other end point ABR 6 Check the AutoVirtLinkEnable box 7 Click Apply End Automatic Virtual Link De
351. work portion is 128 32 while the subnet is found in the first octet of the host portion 10 A subnet mask is applied to the IP address and identifies the network and host portions of the address Subnet masks for Class B and Class C IP addresses page 15 illustrates how subnet masks used with Class B and Class C addresses can create differing numbers of subnets and hosts This example shows the use of the zero subnet which is permitted on a Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5510 Subnet masks for Class B and Class C IP addresses Number of bits oo NIDJI AJOJN o 11 12 13 14 Subnet Mask 255 255 192 0 255 255 224 0 255 255 240 0 255 255 248 0 255 255 252 0 255 255 254 0 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 Class C Number of Subnets Recommended per Subnet Class B 2 i 30 62 254 254 510 126 1 022 2 046 4 094 8 190 16 382 ow oO PM 126 N O N A O ine oJ AJOJN gt 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 255 255 255 248 255 255 255 252 _ A ow Oo ao oO O ine gt O ine Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 16 An Introduction to IP Routing Protocols Variable length subnet masking VLSM is
352. ximum path command is rip maximum path lt path_ count gt Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration using the CLI 111 The lt path_count gt parameter represents the number of ECMP paths allotted This is a value between 1 and 4 The default is 1 The rip maximum path command is executed in the Global Configuration mode ospf maximum path command The ospf maximum path command is used to configure the number of ECMP paths allotted for the Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol The syntax of the osp maximum path command is ospf maximum path lt path_ count gt The lt path_count gt parameter represents the number of ECMP paths allotted This is a value between 1 and 4 The default is 1 The osp maximum path command is executed in the Global Configuration mode maximum path command The maximum path command is used to configure the number of ECMP paths allotted to static routes The syntax of the maximum path command is maximum path lt path_count gt The lt path_count gt parameter represents the number of ECMP paths allotted This is a value between 1 and 4 The default is 1 The maximum path command is executed in the Global Configuration mode show ecmp command The show ecmp command is used to display ECMP path information The syntax of the show ecmp
353. xit interface vlan 105 no ip rip advertise when down enable no ip rip auto aggregation enable no ip rip default listen enable no ip rip default supply enable ip rip cost 1 ip rip holddown 120 ip rip listen enable ip rip out policy Allow no ip rip poison enable no ip rip proxy announce enable ip rip receive version riplOrRip2 ip rip send version riplComp ip rip timeout 180 no ip rip triggered enable ip rip supply enable exit interface vlan 1001 no ip rip advertise when down enable no ip rip auto aggregation enable no ip rip default listen enable no ip rip default supply enable ip rip cost 1 ip rip holddown 120 ip rip listen enable no ip rip poison enable no ip rip proxy announce enable ip rip receive version riplOrRip2 ip rip send version riplComp ip rip timeout 180 Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 167 no ip rip triggered enable ip rip supply enable exit interface vlan 1 no ip rip advertise when down enable no ip rip auto aggregation enable no ip rip default listen enable no ip rip default supply enable ip rip cost 1 ip rip holddown 120 ip rip listen enable no ip rip poison enable no ip rip proxy announce enable ip rip receive version riplOrRip2 ip rip send version riplComp ip rip timeout 180 no ip rip triggered enable ip rip s
354. y router enable 5530 24TFD config router router id 1 1 1 5 5530 24TFD config router area 0 0 0 2 import nssa 5530 24TFD config router network 10 1 1 18 area 0 0 0 2 5530 24TFD config router ospf enable e Configure a route policy to distribute Direct and OSPF to RIP Create a route policy named Rip_Dist that distributes directly connected and OSPF routes into RIP 5530 24TFD config route map Rip Dist permit 1 enable match protocol direct ospf set metric type typel f Apply the Rip_Dist route policy to RIP Out Policy 5530 24TFD config interface vlan 100 5530 24TFD config if ip rip out policy Rip Dist g Configure OSPF route distribution to distribute RIP routes as AS external LSA type 1 5530 24TFD config router ospf 5530 24TFD config router redistribute rip enable metric type typel 5530 24TFD config ip ospf apply redistribute rip End Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series Configuration IP Routing Protocols NN47200 503 03 01 Standard 5 1 27 August 2007 Copyright 2005 2007 Nortel Networks IP routing configuration examples 145 Configuring Area Border Routers ABR Configuration of an OSPF ABR is an automatic process on the Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series no user intervention is required The Nortel Ethernet Routing Switch 5500 Series automatically becomes an OSPF ABR when it has operational OSPF interfaces belonging to more than one area In the configuration example

Nortel Networks NN47200-503 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents